From 7f5d8c4dcc45bf8ecb251e4b170913d96bc6a5ec Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 00:04:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 002/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 008b9d7ec0..5608195d58 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1287,7 +1287,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 7 ej16 figs-quotations γέγραπται, ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν, καὶ ἀνέστησαν παίζειν 1 to play If your language does not use this form, you could translate the command as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it is written that the people sat down to eat and to drink and rose up to play” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 10 7 awhu figs-explicit ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν, καὶ ἀνέστησαν παίζειν 1 to play This quotation comes from a story in which Moses has gone up on a mountain to meet with God. While he is gone, the Israelites make an idol and worship it. This quotation is how their worship is described. Paul chooses this verse because it refers specifically to food sacrificed to idols and to sexual immorality (**play**, see the next note), which are the topics he has and will discuss. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 7 ukp4 figs-euphemism παίζειν 1 to play Here, **play** is a polite way to refer to sexual behavior. If your readers would misunderstand **play**, you could use a comparable polite term. Alternate translation: “to have sex” or “to make love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1CO 10 8 vw5g ἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died “God killed 23,000 people in one day” +1CO 10 8 szje figs-abstractnouns πορνεύωμεν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις 1 these things happened to them “God punished our ancestors” From 7c58cf44be1c669610dabe03e324248c2d69921f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 00:05:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 003/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 5608195d58..642bc8f698 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1287,7 +1287,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 7 ej16 figs-quotations γέγραπται, ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν, καὶ ἀνέστησαν παίζειν 1 to play If your language does not use this form, you could translate the command as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it is written that the people sat down to eat and to drink and rose up to play” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 10 7 awhu figs-explicit ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν, καὶ ἀνέστησαν παίζειν 1 to play This quotation comes from a story in which Moses has gone up on a mountain to meet with God. While he is gone, the Israelites make an idol and worship it. This quotation is how their worship is described. Paul chooses this verse because it refers specifically to food sacrificed to idols and to sexual immorality (**play**, see the next note), which are the topics he has and will discuss. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 7 ukp4 figs-euphemism παίζειν 1 to play Here, **play** is a polite way to refer to sexual behavior. If your readers would misunderstand **play**, you could use a comparable polite term. Alternate translation: “to have sex” or “to make love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1CO 10 8 szje figs-abstractnouns πορνεύωμεν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 8 szje figs-abstractnouns πορνεύωμεν…ἐπόρνευσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral … committed what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways … behaved in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From be5c8298174918747b1061c4b8789c271107bf8f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 00:07:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 004/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 642bc8f698..8d83fb88e3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1289,6 +1289,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 7 ukp4 figs-euphemism παίζειν 1 to play Here, **play** is a polite way to refer to sexual behavior. If your readers would misunderstand **play**, you could use a comparable polite term. Alternate translation: “to have sex” or “to make love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 8 szje figs-abstractnouns πορνεύωμεν…ἐπόρνευσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral … committed what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways … behaved in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died +1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις 1 these things happened to them “God punished our ancestors” From 3c2cb8fea081bd6e384456719ecde65e4d6e3f68 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 00:12:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 005/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 8d83fb88e3..505b85113f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1288,6 +1288,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 7 awhu figs-explicit ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν, καὶ ἀνέστησαν παίζειν 1 to play This quotation comes from a story in which Moses has gone up on a mountain to meet with God. While he is gone, the Israelites make an idol and worship it. This quotation is how their worship is described. Paul chooses this verse because it refers specifically to food sacrificed to idols and to sexual immorality (**play**, see the next note), which are the topics he has and will discuss. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 7 ukp4 figs-euphemism παίζειν 1 to play Here, **play** is a polite way to refer to sexual behavior. If your readers would misunderstand **play**, you could use a comparable polite term. Alternate translation: “to have sex” or “to make love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 8 szje figs-abstractnouns πορνεύωμεν…ἐπόρνευσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral … committed what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways … behaved in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 8 jb3v figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπόρνευσαν, καὶ ἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died +1CO 10 8 vlru grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died 1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) From 0562dd8f8a3773035a2db487c9e4c64cba2dc372 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 00:24:08 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 006/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 505b85113f..402cd8669a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1288,10 +1288,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 7 awhu figs-explicit ἐκάθισεν ὁ λαὸς φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν, καὶ ἀνέστησαν παίζειν 1 to play This quotation comes from a story in which Moses has gone up on a mountain to meet with God. While he is gone, the Israelites make an idol and worship it. This quotation is how their worship is described. Paul chooses this verse because it refers specifically to food sacrificed to idols and to sexual immorality (**play**, see the next note), which are the topics he has and will discuss. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 7 ukp4 figs-euphemism παίζειν 1 to play Here, **play** is a polite way to refer to sexual behavior. If your readers would misunderstand **play**, you could use a comparable polite term. Alternate translation: “to have sex” or “to make love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 8 szje figs-abstractnouns πορνεύωμεν…ἐπόρνευσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral … committed what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways … behaved in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 8 jb3v figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπόρνευσαν, καὶ ἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died +1CO 10 8 jb3v figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπόρνευσαν, καὶ ἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md). In this story, many Israelites began to worship a god named “Baal of Peor.” While worshiping this god, they also **committed sexual immorality**. God judged the Israelites by killing 24,000 of them. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 8 vlru grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died +1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **23,000** does not match the number that the Old Testament story includes, which is 24,000. Most likely, Paul is using a round number here. Consider using ways in your language to express a number, particularly a round number. Alternate translation: “about twenty-three thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “falling.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If **fell** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away” or “fell down dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 2343df62f4d19bdf5e36fb9107832a21d5295efa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 00:25:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 007/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 402cd8669a..d3ebe42089 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1289,7 +1289,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 7 ukp4 figs-euphemism παίζειν 1 to play Here, **play** is a polite way to refer to sexual behavior. If your readers would misunderstand **play**, you could use a comparable polite term. Alternate translation: “to have sex” or “to make love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 8 szje figs-abstractnouns πορνεύωμεν…ἐπόρνευσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “should we commit what is sexually immoral … committed what is sexually immoral” or “should behave in sexually immoral ways … behaved in sexually immoral ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 8 jb3v figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπόρνευσαν, καὶ ἔπεσαν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md). In this story, many Israelites began to worship a god named “Baal of Peor.” While worshiping this god, they also **committed sexual immorality**. God judged the Israelites by killing 24,000 of them. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 10 8 vlru grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 8 vlru grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “committing” **sexual immorality**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result,” or “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **23,000** does not match the number that the Old Testament story includes, which is 24,000. Most likely, Paul is using a round number here. Consider using ways in your language to express a number, particularly a round number. Alternate translation: “about twenty-three thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “falling.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If **fell** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away” or “fell down dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) From a335fc87c262a94a137e7e394200656d9c62171c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 00:27:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 008/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d3ebe42089..b69c2f322a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1292,7 +1292,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 8 vlru grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “committing” **sexual immorality**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result,” or “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **23,000** does not match the number that the Old Testament story includes, which is 24,000. Most likely, Paul is using a round number here. Consider using ways in your language to express a number, particularly a round number. Alternate translation: “about twenty-three thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “falling.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If **fell** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away” or “fell down dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **one day** refers to one cycle of the sun while the sun is up. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this time period. Alternate translation: “in a single day” or “in one daytime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις 1 these things happened to them “God punished our ancestors” From 5699245773d82c8f66cd6a73ff60ceafad2983c1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 00:28:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 009/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b69c2f322a..823adc6f98 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1292,7 +1292,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 8 vlru grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “committing” **sexual immorality**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result,” or “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **23,000** does not match the number that the Old Testament story includes, which is 24,000. Most likely, Paul is using a round number here. Consider using ways in your language to express a number, particularly a round number. Alternate translation: “about twenty-three thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “falling.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If **fell** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away” or “fell down dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **one day** refers to one cycle of the sun while the sun is up. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this time period. Alternate translation: “in a single day” or “in one daytime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **one day** refers to one cycle of the sun while the sun is up. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this time period. Alternate translation: “in a single day” or “during one daytime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις 1 these things happened to them “God punished our ancestors” From f29cdb8cf1f5ae358e8ce970007e3fe34b4c0d80 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 03:18:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 010/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 823adc6f98..2b504c57b9 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1293,7 +1293,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **23,000** does not match the number that the Old Testament story includes, which is 24,000. Most likely, Paul is using a round number here. Consider using ways in your language to express a number, particularly a round number. Alternate translation: “about twenty-three thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “falling.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If **fell** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away” or “fell down dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **one day** refers to one cycle of the sun while the sun is up. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this time period. Alternate translation: “in a single day” or “during one daytime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, snakes destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 9 z4xf figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπείρασαν, καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md). In this story, many Israelites began to worship a god named “Baal of Peor.” While worshiping this god, they also **committed sexual immorality**. God judged the Israelites by killing 24,000 of them. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 9 rhyb grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by snakes Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “putting” **the Lord to the test**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul states that “God” did by using **the snakes**. Alternate translation: “God used snakes to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις 1 these things happened to them “God punished our ancestors” 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 as examples Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 63ef9c2974934d0bc8a017f4cbc550ea84adf61d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 03:23:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 011/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 2b504c57b9..fdb45e32fe 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1293,7 +1293,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 8 vw5g translate-numbers εἴκοσι τρεῖς χιλιάδες 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **23,000** does not match the number that the Old Testament story includes, which is 24,000. Most likely, Paul is using a round number here. Consider using ways in your language to express a number, particularly a round number. Alternate translation: “about twenty-three thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 8 mc7x figs-euphemism ἔπεσαν 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “falling.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If **fell** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away” or “fell down dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **one day** refers to one cycle of the sun while the sun is up. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this time period. Alternate translation: “in a single day” or “during one daytime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -1CO 10 9 z4xf figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπείρασαν, καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md). In this story, many Israelites began to worship a god named “Baal of Peor.” While worshiping this god, they also **committed sexual immorality**. God judged the Israelites by killing 24,000 of them. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 9 z4xf figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπείρασαν, καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md). In this story, many Israelites “spoke against” or challenged their leaders and God himself. In response, God sent **snakes**, and the **snakes** bit the Israelites, and many of them died. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 9 rhyb grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by snakes Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “putting” **the Lord to the test**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul states that “God” did by using **the snakes**. Alternate translation: “God used snakes to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 09063ed6353acc0431555a58e34b218a95bd2f0c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 03:26:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 013/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index fdb45e32fe..f92b311e1b 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 8 zc89 figs-possession τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης 1 the Lord of glory Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Lord** who has **glory**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **glory** with an adjective or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the Lord who has glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 2 9 fu1y grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Things that no eye … arisen, the things … who love him The word translated **But** introduces a contrast with the hypothetical statement in [2:8](../02/08.md) about how the rulers would not have crucified the Lord if they had understood God’s wisdom. The **But** reminds the reader that this hypothetical statement is not true, and Paul wishes to introduce further statements about how people do not understand God’s wisdom. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word or phrase that would signal that Paul is now longer speaking hypothetically. Alternate translation: “But no,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 2 9 wuar figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here, Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary in your language to form a complete thought. If necessary, you can supply a summary from [2:8](../02/08.md) of what the rulers did not understand and how they acted. Alternate translation: “But the rulers did not understand, just as it is written” or “But the rulers did do these things, just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 2 9 qcb2 writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 In Paul’s culture,** just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1CO 2 9 qcb2 writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 In Paul’s culture, **just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 2 9 pt3m figs-infostructure ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη, ἃ ἡτοίμασεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν 1 In this quotation, **What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man** are the **things God has prepared**. If hearing **What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man** before **God has prepared** would be misunderstood in your language, you could reverse the order. Alternate translation: “God has prepared for those who love him what eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 2 9 j9ib figs-synecdoche ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη 1 Things that no eye has seen, no ear has heard, no mind has imagined Here, the words **eye**, **ear**, and **heart** refer to the parts of the person that see, hear, and think. In each case, the word means that the whole person sees, hears, and thinks. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to a person as a whole instead of just a part of that person. Alternate translation: “What a person has not seen, and a person has not heard, and has not arisen when a person thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1CO 2 9 xe03 figs-idiom ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη 1 The phrase **heart of man** refers to the place where humans think. If something “arises” there, that means that a human has thought about that thing. If the meaning of **arisen in the heart of man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “man has not thought about” or “man has not imagined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 3f5e2707f706eb660f36f9201cba97ccecd81e64 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Sun, 8 May 2022 03:26:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 014/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f92b311e1b..46495c42f9 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1166,7 +1166,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 13 slf9 figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ τὰ ἱερὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐσθίουσιν; οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες, τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συνμερίζονται? 1 Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You know that those working in the temple eat from the things of the temple; those serving at the altar partake from the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 13 pq05 figs-explicit οἱ τὰ ἱερὰ ἐργαζόμενοι 1 Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple Here, **those working in the temple** refers to any person whose job takes place in or around the temple. Paul may specifically have the “Levites” or other “temple servants” in mind. If your readers would misunderstand **those working in the temple**, you could use a word or phrase in your language that refers generally to anyone whose job is **in the temple**. Alternate translation: “the temple servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 9 13 ergc translate-unknown τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple Here, to eat **from the things of the temple** means that these people eat some of the food that people donate to the **temple** or offer to God in **the temple**. If **the things of the temple** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what people have offered or given to **the temple**. Alternate translation: “from what people give to the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 9 13 omzu οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες 1 Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple Here, **those serving at the altar** could be: (1) a specific group within **those working in the temple**, specifically the priests who work at the altar. Alternate translation: “particularly, those serving at the altar” (2) another way to speak about **those working in the temple**. Paul repeats himself to clarify exactly what eating ** from the things of the temple** means. Alternate translation: “that is, those serving at the altar” +1CO 9 13 omzu οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες 1 Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple Here, **those serving at the altar** could be: (1) a specific group within **those working in the temple**, specifically the priests who work at the altar. Alternate translation: “particularly, those serving at the altar” (2) another way to speak about **those working in the temple**. Paul repeats himself to clarify exactly what eating **from the things of the temple** means. Alternate translation: “that is, those serving at the altar” 1CO 9 13 fxxi figs-explicit οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες 1 Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple Here, **those serving at the altar** refers to the specific people who offered sacrifices on **the altar**. Paul may specifically have in mind the “priests.” If your readers would misunderstand **those serving at the altar**, you could use a word or phrase for the people who have the closest contact with the deity and offer any sacrifices to that deity. Alternate translation: “the priests” or “those who serve the most sacred things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 9 13 lqar translate-unknown τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συνμερίζονται 1 Do you not know that those who serve in the temple eat from the things of the temple Here, to **partake from the altar** means that these people offer part of a sacrifice on the altar, but they also eat part of that sacrifice. If to **partake from the altar** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to eating part of what people offer to their god. Alternate translation: “eat part of what is sacrificed on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 9 14 g5i8 figs-explicit ὁ Κύριος διέταξεν 1 get their living from the gospel Here Paul refers to how Jesus said that a “worker deserves wages” when he sent people to proclaim the good news. See the saying in [Matthew 10:10](mat/10/10.md) and [Luke 10:7](luk/10/7.md). If your readers would misunderstand what Paul is saying here, you could include a footnote to explain the reference to what Jesus said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From c812bd39694dc0b9ddf5738be3121730ffed7f68 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 13:51:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 015/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 7 +++++-- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 46495c42f9..f536578ac1 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1295,8 +1295,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 8 xqfc translate-numbers μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In one day, twenty-three thousand people died Here, **one day** refers to one cycle of the sun while the sun is up. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this time period. Alternate translation: “in a single day” or “during one daytime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) 1CO 10 9 z4xf figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπείρασαν, καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md). In this story, many Israelites “spoke against” or challenged their leaders and God himself. In response, God sent **snakes**, and the **snakes** bit the Israelites, and many of them died. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 9 rhyb grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by snakes Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “putting” **the Lord to the test**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul states that “God” did by using **the snakes**. Alternate translation: “God used snakes to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as a result, an angel of death destroyed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the snakes**. Alternate translation: “God used snakes to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 10 tdsy figs-explicit τινὲς αὐτῶν ἐγόγγυσαν, καὶ ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Num 16:41–50 +1CO 10 10 cz1e grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “grumbling.” If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the destroyer**. Alternate translation: “God used the destroyer to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις 1 these things happened to them “God punished our ancestors” 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 as examples Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 10 11 j3z1 τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 the end of the ages “the last days have come” From bcaa78da9f582bd6b5a9c0ec3986eec72a759645 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 13:58:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 016/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f536578ac1..621502c70f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 9 z4xf figs-explicit τινες αὐτῶν ἐπείρασαν, καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md). In this story, many Israelites “spoke against” or challenged their leaders and God himself. In response, God sent **snakes**, and the **snakes** bit the Israelites, and many of them died. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 9 rhyb grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by snakes Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “putting” **the Lord to the test**. If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 9 l5h4 figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ὄφεων ἀπώλλυντο 1 were destroyed by snakes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the snakes**. Alternate translation: “God used snakes to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 10 tdsy figs-explicit τινὲς αὐτῶν ἐγόγγυσαν, καὶ ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Num 16:41–50 +1CO 10 10 tdsy figs-explicit τινὲς αὐτῶν ἐγόγγυσαν, καὶ ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md) and perhaps also a story found in [Numbers 14:1–38](num/14/01.md). In both of these stories, Israelites “grumble” or complain about how their leaders and God himself are leading them. In response, God sends a plague or kills Israelites who **grumbled**. If your readers are not familiar with these stories, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Num 16:41–50 1CO 10 10 cz1e grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “grumbling.” If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the destroyer**. Alternate translation: “God used the destroyer to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From b010db16303b5ea715fb7d2520eba8b93ad333cf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 14:01:46 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 017/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 621502c70f..ea5b469e03 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1299,7 +1299,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 10 tdsy figs-explicit τινὲς αὐτῶν ἐγόγγυσαν, καὶ ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here Paul refers to a story found in [Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md) and perhaps also a story found in [Numbers 14:1–38](num/14/01.md). In both of these stories, Israelites “grumble” or complain about how their leaders and God himself are leading them. In response, God sends a plague or kills Israelites who **grumbled**. If your readers are not familiar with these stories, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Num 16:41–50 1CO 10 10 cz1e grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “grumbling.” If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the destroyer**. Alternate translation: “God used the destroyer to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **destroyer** refers to an angelic messenger whom God sends to “destroy.” Sometimes, this angel is called “the Angel of Death.” The stories that Paul refers to do not explicitly mention **the destroyer**, but Paul understands **the destroyer** to be the one who acts out God’s judgment by bringing a plague and killing Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **the destroyer**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a spiritual being that “destroys.” However, this spiritual being must be one whom God could send. Alternate translation: “the angel of death” or “a destroying angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις 1 these things happened to them “God punished our ancestors” 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 as examples Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 10 11 j3z1 τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 the end of the ages “the last days have come” From 2029174ace014d2652d0a965f2a9ae88ae99c631 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 16:53:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 018/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index ea5b469e03..07ad281095 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1300,9 +1300,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 10 cz1e grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “grumbling.” If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the destroyer**. Alternate translation: “God used the destroyer to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **destroyer** refers to an angelic messenger whom God sends to “destroy.” Sometimes, this angel is called “the Angel of Death.” The stories that Paul refers to do not explicitly mention **the destroyer**, but Paul understands **the destroyer** to be the one who acts out God’s judgment by bringing a plague and killing Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **the destroyer**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a spiritual being that “destroys.” However, this spiritual being must be one whom God could send. Alternate translation: “the angel of death” or “a destroying angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 10 11 u1mp ταῦτα…συνέβαινεν ἐκείνοις 1 these things happened to them “God punished our ancestors” -1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 as examples Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1CO 10 11 j3z1 τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 the end of the ages “the last days have come” +1CO 10 11 u1mp writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things happened to them (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 11 bxef translate-unknown τυπικῶς 1 these things happened to them (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 11 zavw figs-activepassive ἐγράφη 1 these things happened to them +1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them +1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 11 j3z1 figs-idiom τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων 1 the end of the ages (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 12 df2p μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall “he does not sin or reject God” 1CO 10 13 a8vj figs-doublenegatives πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1CO 10 13 hc7q ὃς οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “who will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist” From e354d8629ee7f5041546075095d3657c82dbb99a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 17:08:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 019/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 07ad281095..75415f3ba7 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1300,8 +1300,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 10 cz1e grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “grumbling.” If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you could use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the destroyer**. Alternate translation: “God used the destroyer to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **destroyer** refers to an angelic messenger whom God sends to “destroy.” Sometimes, this angel is called “the Angel of Death.” The stories that Paul refers to do not explicitly mention **the destroyer**, but Paul understands **the destroyer** to be the one who acts out God’s judgment by bringing a plague and killing Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **the destroyer**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a spiritual being that “destroys.” However, this spiritual being must be one whom God could send. Alternate translation: “the angel of death” or “a destroying angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 10 11 u1mp writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things happened to them (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 11 bxef translate-unknown τυπικῶς 1 these things happened to them (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 11 u1mp writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things happened to them Here, **these things** refers back to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:7–10](../10/07.md). If your readers would misunderstand **these things** you could clarify what the phrase refers to. Alternate translation: “the events that I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 11 bxef translate-unknown τυπικῶς 1 these things happened to them Just as in [10:6](../10/06.md), **examples** here refers to how the stories about the Israelites function as **examples** or “illustrations” for the believers who hear or read those stories. If your readers would misunderstand **examples**, you could use a comparable word or phrase, and compare with how you translated “examples” in [10:6](../10/06.md). Alternate translation: “as patterns” or “as models” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 11 xlwp grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 2 these things happened to them (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 11 zavw figs-activepassive ἐγράφη 1 these things happened to them 1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 3d0088673098c475d22a8f5333d961948e2b61ca Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 17:09:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 020/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 75415f3ba7..82d0466cc3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1302,7 +1302,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **destroyer** refers to an angelic messenger whom God sends to “destroy.” Sometimes, this angel is called “the Angel of Death.” The stories that Paul refers to do not explicitly mention **the destroyer**, but Paul understands **the destroyer** to be the one who acts out God’s judgment by bringing a plague and killing Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **the destroyer**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a spiritual being that “destroys.” However, this spiritual being must be one whom God could send. Alternate translation: “the angel of death” or “a destroying angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 11 u1mp writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things happened to them Here, **these things** refers back to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:7–10](../10/07.md). If your readers would misunderstand **these things** you could clarify what the phrase refers to. Alternate translation: “the events that I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 11 bxef translate-unknown τυπικῶς 1 these things happened to them Just as in [10:6](../10/06.md), **examples** here refers to how the stories about the Israelites function as **examples** or “illustrations” for the believers who hear or read those stories. If your readers would misunderstand **examples**, you could use a comparable word or phrase, and compare with how you translated “examples” in [10:6](../10/06.md). Alternate translation: “as patterns” or “as models” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 10 11 xlwp grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 2 these things happened to them (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 10 11 xlwp grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 2 these things happened to them Here, **but** introduces a further development. It does not contrast with the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand **but**, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces a further development. Alternate translation: “and” or “and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 11 zavw figs-activepassive ἐγράφη 1 these things happened to them 1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From cd8d471ab4ea8e4bb919c3a72dca6b2a03102813 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 20:19:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 021/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 82d0466cc3..3ba82dd734 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1303,8 +1303,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 11 u1mp writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things happened to them Here, **these things** refers back to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:7–10](../10/07.md). If your readers would misunderstand **these things** you could clarify what the phrase refers to. Alternate translation: “the events that I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 11 bxef translate-unknown τυπικῶς 1 these things happened to them Just as in [10:6](../10/06.md), **examples** here refers to how the stories about the Israelites function as **examples** or “illustrations” for the believers who hear or read those stories. If your readers would misunderstand **examples**, you could use a comparable word or phrase, and compare with how you translated “examples” in [10:6](../10/06.md). Alternate translation: “as patterns” or “as models” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 11 xlwp grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 2 these things happened to them Here, **but** introduces a further development. It does not contrast with the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand **but**, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces a further development. Alternate translation: “and” or “and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 10 11 zavw figs-activepassive ἐγράφη 1 these things happened to them -1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them +1CO 10 11 zavw figs-activepassive ἐγράφη 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “a person wrote them” or “people wrote them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **admonition**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “admonish.” Alternate translation: “to admonish us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 11 j3z1 figs-idiom τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων 1 the end of the ages (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 12 df2p μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall “he does not sin or reject God” From 39a5a89014c0fe691b712cfe556d72c56f52382c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 20:21:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 022/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 3ba82dd734..0ea0ffb6a3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1305,7 +1305,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 11 xlwp grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 2 these things happened to them Here, **but** introduces a further development. It does not contrast with the previous clause. If your readers would misunderstand **but**, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces a further development. Alternate translation: “and” or “and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 11 zavw figs-activepassive ἐγράφη 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “a person wrote them” or “people wrote them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **admonition**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “admonish.” Alternate translation: “to admonish us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples Here Paul speaks as if **the end of the ages** could **come** on somebody. By speaking as if **the end of the ages** were something that could **come**, Paul expresses the idea that he and the Corinthians are living during **the end of the ages**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who live during the end of the ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 11 j3z1 figs-idiom τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων 1 the end of the ages (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 12 df2p μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall “he does not sin or reject God” 1CO 10 13 a8vj figs-doublenegatives πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) From edc5c1feb12b578ae55924685be69cc259485032 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 20:24:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 023/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 0ea0ffb6a3..18a61710fb 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1306,7 +1306,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 11 zavw figs-activepassive ἐγράφη 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “a person wrote them” or “people wrote them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **admonition**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “admonish.” Alternate translation: “to admonish us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples Here Paul speaks as if **the end of the ages** could **come** on somebody. By speaking as if **the end of the ages** were something that could **come**, Paul expresses the idea that he and the Corinthians are living during **the end of the ages**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who live during the end of the ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 11 j3z1 figs-idiom τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων 1 the end of the ages (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 11 j3z1 figs-idiom εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 the end of the ages Here, **the end of the ages** refers to the last period in the history of the world. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. If your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “to whom the end of the world is coming soon” or “on whom the end times have come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 12 df2p μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall “he does not sin or reject God” 1CO 10 13 a8vj figs-doublenegatives πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1CO 10 13 hc7q ὃς οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “who will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist” From 0719df9c6d5e0b8e9bf6c8ea00f10c755914008b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 20:37:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 024/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 18a61710fb..7302b6e5be 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1307,7 +1307,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **admonition**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “admonish.” Alternate translation: “to admonish us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples Here Paul speaks as if **the end of the ages** could **come** on somebody. By speaking as if **the end of the ages** were something that could **come**, Paul expresses the idea that he and the Corinthians are living during **the end of the ages**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who live during the end of the ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 11 j3z1 figs-idiom εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 the end of the ages Here, **the end of the ages** refers to the last period in the history of the world. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. If your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “to whom the end of the world is coming soon” or “on whom the end times have come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 10 12 df2p μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall “he does not sin or reject God” +1CO 10 12 df2p figs-metaphor ἑστάναι…μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 12 hn4j figs-imperative βλεπέτω 1 does not fall Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1CO 10 12 s8yj figs-gendernotations ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **he** and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 13 a8vj figs-doublenegatives πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1CO 10 13 hc7q ὃς οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “who will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist” 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will not allow anyone to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 51a58879692b457f71850c3e52dd10bfc7017411 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 20:44:47 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 025/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 7302b6e5be..bfdf50a4cb 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1307,7 +1307,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 11 xotv figs-abstractnouns πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **admonition**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “admonish.” Alternate translation: “to admonish us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 11 wmp1 figs-metaphor εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 as examples Here Paul speaks as if **the end of the ages** could **come** on somebody. By speaking as if **the end of the ages** were something that could **come**, Paul expresses the idea that he and the Corinthians are living during **the end of the ages**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who live during the end of the ages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 11 j3z1 figs-idiom εἰς οὓς τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων κατήντηκεν 1 the end of the ages Here, **the end of the ages** refers to the last period in the history of the world. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. If your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “to whom the end of the world is coming soon” or “on whom the end times have come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 10 12 df2p figs-metaphor ἑστάναι…μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 12 df2p figs-metaphor ἑστάναι…μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Here someone who **stands** is someone who is strong and faithful when following Jesus. People who **fall** are those who fail to faithfully follow Jesus and whom God punishes, just like he punished the Israelites. “Standing” and “falling” represent physically the spiritual state of the person. If your readers would misunderstand **stands** and **fall**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “he has firm footing … he might not slip” or “he acts faithfully … he might not fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 12 hn4j figs-imperative βλεπέτω 1 does not fall Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 12 s8yj figs-gendernotations ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **he** and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 13 a8vj figs-doublenegatives πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) From c83482d6461423cc718372f992288d4d799a3db6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 20:49:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 026/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index bfdf50a4cb..3a82b209a6 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1310,7 +1310,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 12 df2p figs-metaphor ἑστάναι…μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Here someone who **stands** is someone who is strong and faithful when following Jesus. People who **fall** are those who fail to faithfully follow Jesus and whom God punishes, just like he punished the Israelites. “Standing” and “falling” represent physically the spiritual state of the person. If your readers would misunderstand **stands** and **fall**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “he has firm footing … he might not slip” or “he acts faithfully … he might not fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 12 hn4j figs-imperative βλεπέτω 1 does not fall Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 12 s8yj figs-gendernotations ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **he** and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 10 13 a8vj figs-doublenegatives πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1CO 10 13 a8vj grammar-connect-exceptions πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 10 13 hc7q ὃς οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “who will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist” 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will not allow anyone to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ. From 04f52318743b4c35fec0139473cc377741439e71 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 20:51:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 027/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 3a82b209a6..d2cc915b26 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1311,7 +1311,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 12 hn4j figs-imperative βλεπέτω 1 does not fall Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 12 s8yj figs-gendernotations ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **he** and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 13 a8vj grammar-connect-exceptions πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) -1CO 10 13 hc7q ὃς οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “who will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist” +1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will not allow anyone to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ. 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 68ccac10ffa8c8817d3e52f06b79520d9239a04c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 21:00:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 028/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 9 +++++++-- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d2cc915b26..d2aa36a6db 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1311,8 +1311,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 12 hn4j figs-imperative βλεπέτω 1 does not fall Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 12 s8yj figs-gendernotations ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **he** and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 13 a8vj grammar-connect-exceptions πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) -1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive οὐκ ἐάσει ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will not allow anyone to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1CO 10 13 e4je figs-abstractnouns πειρασμὸς…σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability +1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted +1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ. 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. From 974b5ddd6bb0c34ba29d94c69e992a9b9deb25d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 21:34:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 029/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d2aa36a6db..a32c3b5abb 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1312,12 +1312,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 12 s8yj figs-gendernotations ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **he** and **him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 13 a8vj grammar-connect-exceptions πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1CO 10 13 e4je figs-abstractnouns πειρασμὸς…σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability +1CO 10 13 e4je figs-abstractnouns πειρασμὸς…οὐκ…σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **temptation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Nothing that is tempting … with what is tempting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted 1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ. 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. From 0ec5410902600749b8e00602b87577c6e230af54 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 21:36:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 030/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index a32c3b5abb..b28fa8287e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1313,7 +1313,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 a8vj grammar-connect-exceptions πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 10 13 e4je figs-abstractnouns πειρασμὸς…οὐκ…σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **temptation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Nothing that is tempting … with what is tempting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Something that **is common to humanity** is something that many humans experience, and it is not unique to one or two people. If your readers would misunderstand **what is common to humanity**, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “what is usual for humans” or “what other people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted 1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) From 121c8b91391b76100bf18d35f4ad427ad7bca956 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 21:37:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 031/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b28fa8287e..0e859e36ac 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1314,7 +1314,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 10 13 e4je figs-abstractnouns πειρασμὸς…οὐκ…σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **temptation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Nothing that is tempting … with what is tempting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Something that **is common to humanity** is something that many humans experience, and it is not unique to one or two people. If your readers would misunderstand **what is common to humanity**, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “what is usual for humans” or “what other people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted +1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “someone to tempt you” or “anybody to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From f695681eafbd23024e93345c9714fa6fc6e62b21 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 21:40:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 032/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 0e859e36ac..c6909dfd9d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1315,7 +1315,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 e4je figs-abstractnouns πειρασμὸς…οὐκ…σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **temptation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Nothing that is tempting … with what is tempting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Something that **is common to humanity** is something that many humans experience, and it is not unique to one or two people. If your readers would misunderstand **what is common to humanity**, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “what is usual for humans” or “what other people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “someone to tempt you” or “anybody to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks as if a **temptation** could be **beyond** what the Corinthians **are able** to handle. By speaking as if the **temptation** is too far in distance, Paul emphasizes that a **temptation** that is **beyond** would be one that the Corinthians could not resist, just as they could not reach a place that is **beyond** them. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “above what you are able” or “so that you are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) From 4998f903e4245e5bc4c84fb410de73bb5de64c0d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 21:41:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 033/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index c6909dfd9d..c2ccc9179c 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1316,7 +1316,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Something that **is common to humanity** is something that many humans experience, and it is not unique to one or two people. If your readers would misunderstand **what is common to humanity**, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “what is usual for humans” or “what other people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “someone to tempt you” or “anybody to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks as if a **temptation** could be **beyond** what the Corinthians **are able** to handle. By speaking as if the **temptation** is too far in distance, Paul emphasizes that a **temptation** that is **beyond** would be one that the Corinthians could not resist, just as they could not reach a place that is **beyond** them. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “above what you are able” or “so that you are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul omits what the Corinthians **are able** to do. If your language would state what they **are able** to do, you could include a word or phrase that would be used for “resisting” a temptation. Alternate translation: “you are able to withstand” or “you are able to endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ. From 78ed5271d7667ff2b54db1b472e8a8623a04ffea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 21:45:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 034/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index c2ccc9179c..750d19e6cf 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1317,8 +1317,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “someone to tempt you” or “anybody to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks as if a **temptation** could be **beyond** what the Corinthians **are able** to handle. By speaking as if the **temptation** is too far in distance, Paul emphasizes that a **temptation** that is **beyond** would be one that the Corinthians could not resist, just as they could not reach a place that is **beyond** them. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “above what you are able” or “so that you are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul omits what the Corinthians **are able** to do. If your language would state what they **are able** to do, you could include a word or phrase that would be used for “resisting” a temptation. Alternate translation: “you are able to withstand” or “you are able to endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks of a **temptation** as if it were a trap that had a **way of escape**. By speaking in this way, Paul tells the Corinthians that God always provides a way to deal with a **temptation**, just as if a trap always had a **way of escape**. If your readers would misunderstand **way of escape**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the way out” or “the way to withstand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted Here, **so that you will be able to endure it** could (1) state the purpose of God giving **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape in order that you will be able to endure it” (2) define **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, that is, that you will be able to endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ. 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. From 3d44cb7c2c4ebddf48cbb11198054dc853c9914d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 21:45:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 035/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 750d19e6cf..d657186667 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1318,7 +1318,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 idi9 figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ ὃ δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks as if a **temptation** could be **beyond** what the Corinthians **are able** to handle. By speaking as if the **temptation** is too far in distance, Paul emphasizes that a **temptation** that is **beyond** would be one that the Corinthians could not resist, just as they could not reach a place that is **beyond** them. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “above what you are able” or “so that you are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul omits what the Corinthians **are able** to do. If your language would state what they **are able** to do, you could include a word or phrase that would be used for “resisting” a temptation. Alternate translation: “you are able to withstand” or “you are able to endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks of a **temptation** as if it were a trap that had a **way of escape**. By speaking in this way, Paul tells the Corinthians that God always provides a way to deal with a **temptation**, just as if a trap always had a **way of escape**. If your readers would misunderstand **way of escape**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the way out” or “the way to withstand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted Here, **so that you will be able to endure it** could (1) state the purpose of God giving **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape in order that you will be able to endure it” (2) define **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, that is, that you will be able to endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted Here, **so that you will be able to endure it** could (1) state the purpose of God giving **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape in order that you will be able to endure it” (2) define **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, which is being able to endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ. 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. From 160f07b9277525b999c3b9403bb18b9fc58ba770 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:01:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 036/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d657186667..313fd1e84a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 au0q figs-ellipsis δύνασθε 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul omits what the Corinthians **are able** to do. If your language would state what they **are able** to do, you could include a word or phrase that would be used for “resisting” a temptation. Alternate translation: “you are able to withstand” or “you are able to endure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks of a **temptation** as if it were a trap that had a **way of escape**. By speaking in this way, Paul tells the Corinthians that God always provides a way to deal with a **temptation**, just as if a trap always had a **way of escape**. If your readers would misunderstand **way of escape**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the way out” or “the way to withstand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted Here, **so that you will be able to endure it** could (1) state the purpose of God giving **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape in order that you will be able to endure it” (2) define **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, which is being able to endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1CO 10 14 dab4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ. +1CO 10 14 dab4 figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. 1CO 10 16 tv8e ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν 1 that we bless “for which we thank God” From 3f8834dedcfb86159f40114fd973a9a019cb7403 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:03:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 037/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 313fd1e84a..826bc3e2d3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1320,7 +1320,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 ek5d figs-metaphor τὴν ἔκβασιν 1 will not let you be tempted Here Paul speaks of a **temptation** as if it were a trap that had a **way of escape**. By speaking in this way, Paul tells the Corinthians that God always provides a way to deal with a **temptation**, just as if a trap always had a **way of escape**. If your readers would misunderstand **way of escape**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the way out” or “the way to withstand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted Here, **so that you will be able to endure it** could (1) state the purpose of God giving **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape in order that you will be able to endure it” (2) define **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, which is being able to endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: “do all you can to get away from worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ 1 flee away from idolatry Just as in [6:18](../06/18.md), here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **idolatry** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “carefully stay away from” or “fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. 1CO 10 16 tv8e ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν 1 that we bless “for which we thank God” 1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας, ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know, that the cup of wine that we share represents us sharing in the blood of Christ. Alternate translation: “When we bless the cup in the Lord’s Supper, we share in the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 3dcd687bcb275a18775a4b4b67269acf11c124d1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:05:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 038/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 826bc3e2d3..0fc74cd4a3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1321,6 +1321,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 13 er9d grammar-connect-logic-goal τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 will not let you be tempted Here, **so that you will be able to endure it** could (1) state the purpose of God giving **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape in order that you will be able to endure it” (2) define **the way of escape**. Alternate translation: “the way of escape, which is being able to endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 10 14 dab4 figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ 1 flee away from idolatry Just as in [6:18](../06/18.md), here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **idolatry** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “carefully stay away from” or “fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. 1CO 10 16 tv8e ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν 1 that we bless “for which we thank God” 1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας, ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know, that the cup of wine that we share represents us sharing in the blood of Christ. Alternate translation: “When we bless the cup in the Lord’s Supper, we share in the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From a424b8f45e43f06969d382e7b64b87ec53fee7a6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:27:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 039/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 0fc74cd4a3..b19ad74289 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1322,6 +1322,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 14 dab4 figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ 1 flee away from idolatry Just as in [6:18](../06/18.md), here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **idolatry** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “carefully stay away from” or “fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **what I say**, you could use a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. 1CO 10 16 tv8e ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν 1 that we bless “for which we thank God” 1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας, ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know, that the cup of wine that we share represents us sharing in the blood of Christ. Alternate translation: “When we bless the cup in the Lord’s Supper, we share in the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 503f3bf4f9276cafadee9db4deb97e1ec8835ad1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:32:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 040/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b19ad74289..c541de1f69 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1322,6 +1322,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 14 dab4 figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ 1 flee away from idolatry Just as in [6:18](../06/18.md), here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **idolatry** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “carefully stay away from” or “fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who talks to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **what I say**, you could use a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. 1CO 10 16 tv8e ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν 1 that we bless “for which we thank God” From dabc9731990ac722e9fc1cf11589d5f69ed21203 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:43:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 041/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 10 ++++++---- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index c541de1f69..e4c6405f64 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1324,10 +1324,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who talks to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **what I say**, you could use a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 16 gi4s τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας…τὸν ἄρτον 1 The cup of blessing Paul is speaking of the cup of wine and the bread that were used in the ritual of the Lord’s Supper. -1CO 10 16 tv8e ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν 1 that we bless “for which we thank God” -1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας, ὃ εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know, that the cup of wine that we share represents us sharing in the blood of Christ. Alternate translation: “When we bless the cup in the Lord’s Supper, we share in the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion τὸν ἄρτον ὃν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know. Alternate translation: “When we break the bread of the Lord’s Supper, we share in the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession\n τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 16 tv8e figs-abstractnouns τῆς εὐλογίας 1 that we bless +1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “share” instead. Alternate translation: “sharing in the blood of Christ … sharing in the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 16 g8ad translate-unknown κλῶμεν 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 g954 ἄρτος 1 loaf of bread a single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten 1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? 1 What am I saying then? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 1a90505c10f17c6017d3d3084d8991701e47b7e4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:44:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 042/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index e4c6405f64..8c200a9328 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who talks to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **what I say**, you could use a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession\n τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession\n τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** that gives **blessing**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “bless” instead. Alternate translation: “The cup that blesses and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 tv8e figs-abstractnouns τῆς εὐλογίας 1 that we bless 1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “share” instead. Alternate translation: “sharing in the blood of Christ … sharing in the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From e8dcd31196020677823664cd9ff44bdeb86e4d11 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:57:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 043/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 8c200a9328..1ff98caa12 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1325,7 +1325,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who talks to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **what I say**, you could use a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession\n τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** that gives **blessing**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “bless” instead. Alternate translation: “The cup that blesses and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 10 16 tv8e figs-abstractnouns τῆς εὐλογίας 1 that we bless +1CO 10 16 tavb figs-metonymy\n τὸ ποτήριον 1 The cup of blessing Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If your readers would misunderstand **cup**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “The drink” or “The wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 10 16 tv8e figs-abstractnouns τῆς εὐλογίας 1 that we bless If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **blessing**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “bless.” Alternate translation: “that blesses and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “share” instead. Alternate translation: “sharing in the blood of Christ … sharing in the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 5d551f38ae325a3e2447efd759f830c78c2223de Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 22:58:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 044/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 1ff98caa12..220142a02e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1327,9 +1327,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession\n τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** that gives **blessing**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “bless” instead. Alternate translation: “The cup that blesses and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 tavb figs-metonymy\n τὸ ποτήριον 1 The cup of blessing Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If your readers would misunderstand **cup**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “The drink” or “The wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 16 tv8e figs-abstractnouns τῆς εὐλογίας 1 that we bless If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **blessing**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “bless.” Alternate translation: “that blesses and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we bless is certainly a sharing of the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “share” instead. Alternate translation: “sharing in the blood of Christ … sharing in the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we break is certainly a sharing of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 g8ad translate-unknown κλῶμεν 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 g954 ἄρτος 1 loaf of bread a single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten 1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From db52f2ea2574e78b1f835b55f7a359def620c670 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 23:00:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 045/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 220142a02e..7d25387f5e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we bless is certainly a sharing of the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “share” instead. Alternate translation: “sharing in the blood of Christ … sharing in the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we break is certainly a sharing of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 16 g8ad translate-unknown κλῶμεν 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 16 g8ad translate-unknown κλῶμεν 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Here, to **break** bread refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. By using **we break**, Paul is referring to many people together eating **bread**. If your readers would misunderstand **we break**, you could use a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat **bread** while still emphasizing that many people eat the **bread**. Alternate translation: “we eat together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 g954 ἄρτος 1 loaf of bread a single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten 1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? 1 What am I saying then? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From e10e6b8d39e244e2916e508158ea279afc1743cf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Mon, 9 May 2022 23:11:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 046/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 7d25387f5e..3ddde4a1bb 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1324,11 +1324,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who talks to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **what I say**, you could use a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession\n τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** that gives **blessing**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “bless” instead. Alternate translation: “The cup that blesses and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession\n τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** is characterized by **blessing**. This phrase identifies a specific **cup**, here the **cup** used in the Lord’s Supper. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could identify the **cup** as the one used in the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “The cup in the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 tavb figs-metonymy\n τὸ ποτήριον 1 The cup of blessing Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If your readers would misunderstand **cup**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “The drink” or “The wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 16 tv8e figs-abstractnouns τῆς εὐλογίας 1 that we bless If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **blessing**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “bless.” Alternate translation: “that blesses and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 16 y5uv figs-rquestion εὐλογοῦμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία ἐστὶν τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ? 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we bless is certainly a sharing of the blood of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a verbal form of “share” instead. Alternate translation: “sharing in the blood of Christ … sharing in the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. This could refer primarily to: (1) communion in or union with Christ himself. Alternate translation: “communion with the blood of Christ … communion with the body of Christ” (2) being joined together with other believers, which comes from sharing in the **blood** and **body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “sharing in fellowship based on the blood of Christ … sharing in fellowship based on the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we break is certainly a sharing of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 g8ad translate-unknown κλῶμεν 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Here, to **break** bread refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. By using **we break**, Paul is referring to many people together eating **bread**. If your readers would misunderstand **we break**, you could use a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat **bread** while still emphasizing that many people eat the **bread**. Alternate translation: “we eat together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 g954 ἄρτος 1 loaf of bread a single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten From 727b00b2a8102b1bc220007beb4f84b54a9e80fd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 13:59:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 047/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 3ddde4a1bb..dc560be4c7 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1331,7 +1331,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. This could refer primarily to: (1) communion in or union with Christ himself. Alternate translation: “communion with the blood of Christ … communion with the body of Christ” (2) being joined together with other believers, which comes from sharing in the **blood** and **body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “sharing in fellowship based on the blood of Christ … sharing in fellowship based on the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we break is certainly a sharing of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 g8ad translate-unknown κλῶμεν 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Here, to **break** bread refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. By using **we break**, Paul is referring to many people together eating **bread**. If your readers would misunderstand **we break**, you could use a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat **bread** while still emphasizing that many people eat the **bread**. Alternate translation: “we eat together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 10 17 g954 ἄρτος 1 loaf of bread a single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten +1CO 10 17 g954 translate-unknown εἷς ἄρτος…τοῦ ἑνὸς 1 loaf of bread (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 17 vvt7 figs-metaphor ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 loaf of bread Here Paul is speaking as if those who **partake from the one bread** together share **one body**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these people have when they eat the **one bread**, which is as close as if they had only one body. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we who are many share all things together” or “we who are many are united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? 1 What am I saying then? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 j8dj figs-ellipsis ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? The words “I am saying” are understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Am I saying that food sacrificed to idols or idols themselves are important?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) From 78463a7e43672cdea0843fddee8e8a761802e375 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 14:03:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 048/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index dc560be4c7..67dee3b867 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1331,7 +1331,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. This could refer primarily to: (1) communion in or union with Christ himself. Alternate translation: “communion with the blood of Christ … communion with the body of Christ” (2) being joined together with other believers, which comes from sharing in the **blood** and **body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “sharing in fellowship based on the blood of Christ … sharing in fellowship based on the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we break is certainly a sharing of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 g8ad translate-unknown κλῶμεν 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Here, to **break** bread refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. By using **we break**, Paul is referring to many people together eating **bread**. If your readers would misunderstand **we break**, you could use a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat **bread** while still emphasizing that many people eat the **bread**. Alternate translation: “we eat together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 10 17 g954 translate-unknown εἷς ἄρτος…τοῦ ἑνὸς 1 loaf of bread (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 17 g954 translate-unknown εἷς ἄρτος…τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου 1 loaf of bread Here, Paul speaks of **one bread** because he has in mind one “loaf” of **bread** from which **we** would eat pieces. If your readers would misunderstand **one bread**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to one loaf of **bread**. Alternate translation: “{there is} one loaf … the one loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 vvt7 figs-metaphor ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 loaf of bread Here Paul is speaking as if those who **partake from the one bread** together share **one body**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these people have when they eat the **one bread**, which is as close as if they had only one body. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we who are many share all things together” or “we who are many are united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? 1 What am I saying then? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From f6219fdb4bb13caf6f7a43840ff255b0f2dbd00f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 15:51:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 049/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++++- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 67dee3b867..e4817f0907 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1331,9 +1331,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 16 yek5 figs-possession κοινωνία…τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ…κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **a sharing** that “shares in” the **blood** and **body** of Christ. This could refer primarily to: (1) communion in or union with Christ himself. Alternate translation: “communion with the blood of Christ … communion with the body of Christ” (2) being joined together with other believers, which comes from sharing in the **blood** and **body** of Christ. Alternate translation: “sharing in fellowship based on the blood of Christ … sharing in fellowship based on the body of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 ngf6 figs-rquestion κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία τοῦ σώματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐστιν? 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it is.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we break is certainly a sharing of the body of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 16 g8ad translate-unknown κλῶμεν 1 The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? Here, to **break** bread refers to taking a large loaf and splitting it up into pieces so that many people can eat the pieces. By using **we break**, Paul is referring to many people together eating **bread**. If your readers would misunderstand **we break**, you could use a word or phrase in your language that refers to how people eat **bread** while still emphasizing that many people eat the **bread**. Alternate translation: “we eat together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 17 gfur figs-infostructure ὅτι εἷς ἄρτος, ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν; οἱ γὰρ πάντες ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου μετέχομεν 1 loaf of bread Here, Paul presents his argument by stating a premise, a conclusion, and then another premise. If your language would naturally state both premises before the conclusion, you could rearrange these clauses. Alternate translation: “Because {there is} one bread, and we all partake from the one bread, we who are many {are} one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 17 g954 translate-unknown εἷς ἄρτος…τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου 1 loaf of bread Here, Paul speaks of **one bread** because he has in mind one “loaf” of **bread** from which **we** would eat pieces. If your readers would misunderstand **one bread**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to one loaf of **bread**. Alternate translation: “{there is} one loaf … the one loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 vvt7 figs-metaphor ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 loaf of bread Here Paul is speaking as if those who **partake from the one bread** together share **one body**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these people have when they eat the **one bread**, which is as close as if they had only one body. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we who are many share all things together” or “we who are many are united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 18 f97w figs-idiom τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? 1 What am I saying then? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 j8dj figs-ellipsis ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? The words “I am saying” are understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Am I saying that food sacrificed to idols or idols themselves are important?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul wants the Corinthians to answer the question in their minds so he does not have to tell them. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not saying that an idol is something real or that food sacrificed to idols is important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 0686e3152433bc2fea60c72bb33abb29eb8882fa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 15:58:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 050/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index e4817f0907..11fe75c36c 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1336,8 +1336,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 17 vvt7 figs-metaphor ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 loaf of bread Here Paul is speaking as if those who **partake from the one bread** together share **one body**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these people have when they eat the **one bread**, which is as close as if they had only one body. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we who are many share all things together” or “we who are many are united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 18 f97w figs-idiom τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul refers to how the priests would offer some of a sacrifice to God, while the person who gave the sacrifice and others with that person would eat the rest. In this way, the person who gave the sacrifice shared the food with God and with others. If your readers would misunderstand **who are eating the sacrifices**, you could clarify what Paul has in mind in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “those who eat the rest of the sacrifices after the priest has offered the best parts to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 18 cxzh figs-synecdoche τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses **altar** as a way to refer to the altar itself and what the priests did with the altar, including the sacrificing of animals to God. If your readers would misunderstand **altar**, you could clarify that Paul has in mind what happens at **the altar**. Alternate translation: “of the worship of God at the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? 1 What am I saying then? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 j8dj figs-ellipsis ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? The words “I am saying” are understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Am I saying that food sacrificed to idols or idols themselves are important?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul wants the Corinthians to answer the question in their minds so he does not have to tell them. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not saying that an idol is something real or that food sacrificed to idols is important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 75c30c33dfb1f386e83b4cbfbec07781409d69d6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 15:59:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 051/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 11fe75c36c..357f5cf7c5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1335,7 +1335,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 17 g954 translate-unknown εἷς ἄρτος…τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου 1 loaf of bread Here, Paul speaks of **one bread** because he has in mind one “loaf” of **bread** from which **we** would eat pieces. If your readers would misunderstand **one bread**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to one loaf of **bread**. Alternate translation: “{there is} one loaf … the one loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 vvt7 figs-metaphor ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 loaf of bread Here Paul is speaking as if those who **partake from the one bread** together share **one body**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these people have when they eat the **one bread**, which is as close as if they had only one body. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we who are many share all things together” or “we who are many are united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 18 f97w figs-idiom τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, they are.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “those who are eating the sacrifices are certainly partakers of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul refers to how the priests would offer some of a sacrifice to God, while the person who gave the sacrifice and others with that person would eat the rest. In this way, the person who gave the sacrifice shared the food with God and with others. If your readers would misunderstand **who are eating the sacrifices**, you could clarify what Paul has in mind in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “those who eat the rest of the sacrifices after the priest has offered the best parts to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 18 cxzh figs-synecdoche τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses **altar** as a way to refer to the altar itself and what the priests did with the altar, including the sacrificing of animals to God. If your readers would misunderstand **altar**, you could clarify that Paul has in mind what happens at **the altar**. Alternate translation: “of the worship of God at the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 7eebbceeab38dfb7c5ab39bacef2f72150494bec Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 16:04:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 052/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 357f5cf7c5..3c647610df 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1334,7 +1334,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 17 gfur figs-infostructure ὅτι εἷς ἄρτος, ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν; οἱ γὰρ πάντες ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου μετέχομεν 1 loaf of bread Here, Paul presents his argument by stating a premise, a conclusion, and then another premise. If your language would naturally state both premises before the conclusion, you could rearrange these clauses. Alternate translation: “Because {there is} one bread, and we all partake from the one bread, we who are many {are} one body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 17 g954 translate-unknown εἷς ἄρτος…τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου 1 loaf of bread Here, Paul speaks of **one bread** because he has in mind one “loaf” of **bread** from which **we** would eat pieces. If your readers would misunderstand **one bread**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to one loaf of **bread**. Alternate translation: “{there is} one loaf … the one loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 17 vvt7 figs-metaphor ἓν σῶμα οἱ πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 loaf of bread Here Paul is speaking as if those who **partake from the one bread** together share **one body**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these people have when they eat the **one bread**, which is as close as if they had only one body. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we who are many share all things together” or “we who are many are united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 18 f97w figs-idiom τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 18 f97w figs-idiom τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here, **according to the flesh** identifies **Israel** as a reference to the people who are physically descended from Abraham and part of the nation of **Israel**. If your readers would misunderstand **according to the flesh**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to physical descent or genealogy. Alternate translation: “ethnic Israel” or “Israel by physical descent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 18 q9ng figs-rquestion οὐχὶ οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας, κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου εἰσίν? 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, they are.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “those who are eating the sacrifices are certainly partakers of the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul refers to how the priests would offer some of a sacrifice to God, while the person who gave the sacrifice and others with that person would eat the rest. In this way, the person who gave the sacrifice shared the food with God and with others. If your readers would misunderstand **who are eating the sacrifices**, you could clarify what Paul has in mind in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “those who eat the rest of the sacrifices after the priest has offered the best parts to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From bd2ff631f8e9b0837b76a4bbf612af890934ac43 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 16:14:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 053/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 3c647610df..6928f87ab6 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1339,8 +1339,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul refers to how the priests would offer some of a sacrifice to God, while the person who gave the sacrifice and others with that person would eat the rest. In this way, the person who gave the sacrifice shared the food with God and with others. If your readers would misunderstand **who are eating the sacrifices**, you could clarify what Paul has in mind in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “those who eat the rest of the sacrifices after the priest has offered the best parts to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 18 cxzh figs-synecdoche τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses **altar** as a way to refer to the altar itself and what the priests did with the altar, including the sacrificing of animals to God. If your readers would misunderstand **altar**, you could clarify that Paul has in mind what happens at **the altar**. Alternate translation: “of the worship of God at the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? 1 What am I saying then? Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: “Let me review what I am saying.” or “This is what I mean.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 19 j8dj figs-ellipsis ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? The words “I am saying” are understood from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Am I saying that food sacrificed to idols or idols themselves are important?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 What am I saying then? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 19 j8dj translate-unknown εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people, who would then eat it in their homes. In the next verses, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul wants the Corinthians to answer the question in their minds so he does not have to tell them. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not saying that an idol is something real or that food sacrificed to idols is important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων 1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons “It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons” From 6b67f8076b191071157c61dd72cf2fede9e56ed2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 16:15:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 054/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 6928f87ab6..017f551c1c 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1339,10 +1339,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul refers to how the priests would offer some of a sacrifice to God, while the person who gave the sacrifice and others with that person would eat the rest. In this way, the person who gave the sacrifice shared the food with God and with others. If your readers would misunderstand **who are eating the sacrifices**, you could clarify what Paul has in mind in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “those who eat the rest of the sacrifices after the priest has offered the best parts to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 18 cxzh figs-synecdoche τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses **altar** as a way to refer to the altar itself and what the priests did with the altar, including the sacrificing of animals to God. If your readers would misunderstand **altar**, you could clarify that Paul has in mind what happens at **the altar**. Alternate translation: “of the worship of God at the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 What am I saying then? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? ὅτι 1 What am I saying then? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 j8dj translate-unknown εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people, who would then eat it in their homes. In the next verses, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul wants the Corinthians to answer the question in their minds so he does not have to tell them. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not saying that an idol is something real or that food sacrificed to idols is important.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων 1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons “It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons” 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From a864a7309f973d7d227fd3c615811693d2dd4bac Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 16:23:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 055/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 017f551c1c..421ac3d5e0 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1343,6 +1343,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 19 j8dj translate-unknown εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people, who would then eat it in their homes. In the next verses, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **food sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **food sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** exist or not. Alternate translation: “exists … exists” 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων 1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons “It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons” 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 5f8b5e4d0cfdaa4bad2e50c2ad45b163973c523d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 16:27:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 056/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 421ac3d5e0..2c0fa1963d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1340,6 +1340,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 18 cxzh figs-synecdoche τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses **altar** as a way to refer to the altar itself and what the priests did with the altar, including the sacrificing of animals to God. If your readers would misunderstand **altar**, you could clarify that Paul has in mind what happens at **the altar**. Alternate translation: “of the worship of God at the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? ὅτι 1 What am I saying then? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 19 b9ct writing-pronouns τί οὖν φημι 1 What am I saying then? Here Paul is referring to what he has said in his argument about idols and things sacrificed to them. If your readers would misunderstand that Paul is referring to what he has said so far, you could express that more clearly. Alternate translation: “What does what I have argued imply, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 19 j8dj translate-unknown εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people, who would then eat it in their homes. In the next verses, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From d7d69c2000909b114639daa3df1460081bb9fa03 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 16:30:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 057/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 2c0fa1963d..706e54be6b 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1339,7 +1339,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 18 w3qn figs-explicit οἱ ἐσθίοντες τὰς θυσίας 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul refers to how the priests would offer some of a sacrifice to God, while the person who gave the sacrifice and others with that person would eat the rest. In this way, the person who gave the sacrifice shared the food with God and with others. If your readers would misunderstand **who are eating the sacrifices**, you could clarify what Paul has in mind in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “those who eat the rest of the sacrifices after the priest has offered the best parts to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 18 wz2h figs-possession κοινωνοὶ τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the altar**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the altar** and what it represents. Alternate translation: “partaking in the altar” (2) being joined together with other Israelites, which comes from “partaking” in **the altar**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 18 cxzh figs-synecdoche τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? Here Paul uses **altar** as a way to refer to the altar itself and what the priests did with the altar, including the sacrificing of animals to God. If your readers would misunderstand **altar**, you could clarify that Paul has in mind what happens at **the altar**. Alternate translation: “of the worship of God at the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? ὅτι 1 What am I saying then? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 19 ix5q figs-rquestion τί οὖν φημι? ὅτι 1 What am I saying then? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question introduces a clarifying statement from Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a statement that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “Here is what I want to clarify: is it true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 b9ct writing-pronouns τί οὖν φημι 1 What am I saying then? Here Paul is referring to what he has said in his argument about idols and things sacrificed to them. If your readers would misunderstand that Paul is referring to what he has said so far, you could express that more clearly. Alternate translation: “What does what I have argued imply, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 19 j8dj translate-unknown εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people, who would then eat it in their homes. In the next verses, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From d15de0a74e39d3d516cba3b60f9520d71233f08d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 16:34:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 058/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 706e54be6b..104c834ce9 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1343,7 +1343,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 19 b9ct writing-pronouns τί οὖν φημι 1 What am I saying then? Here Paul is referring to what he has said in his argument about idols and things sacrificed to them. If your readers would misunderstand that Paul is referring to what he has said so far, you could express that more clearly. Alternate translation: “What does what I have argued imply, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 19 j8dj translate-unknown εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), here Paul speaks about animals that are slaughtered, offered to a god, and then eaten. For many people in Paul’s culture, this was the only meat that was available for them to eat. In many cases, people would eat this meat at a god’s temple or shrine. However, sometimes the meat could be sold to people, who would then eat it in their homes. In the next verses, Paul will speak about whether and how Christians should eat or not eat this meat. If your language has a specific word or phrase for meat from an animal that has been offered to a god, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “meat from animals sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion οὖν…ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, they are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then? Food sacrificed to idols is nothing, and an idol is nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **food sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **food sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** exist or not. Alternate translation: “exists … exists” 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων 1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons “It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons” From 10cee5862e84180197a333404a03cf213a967ac7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 17:10:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 059/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 104c834ce9..b4153d6549 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1345,6 +1345,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion οὖν…ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, they are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then? Food sacrificed to idols is nothing, and an idol is nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **food sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **food sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** exist or not. Alternate translation: “exists … exists” +1CO 10 20 hvi0 figs-infostructure ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη…θύουσιν 1 +1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with non-believers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων 1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons “It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons” 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 31323fe80e86b66186a28197ef00f60c68f7f7d1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Tue, 10 May 2022 19:01:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 060/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b4153d6549..677e4198de 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1345,7 +1345,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion οὖν…ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, they are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then? Food sacrificed to idols is nothing, and an idol is nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **food sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **food sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** exist or not. Alternate translation: “exists … exists” -1CO 10 20 hvi0 figs-infostructure ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη…θύουσιν 1 +1CO 10 20 hvi0 figs-infostructure ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη…θύουσιν 1 Here Paul states the object before the verb. If your language would always put the object after the verb, you could rearrange this clause. Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles sacrifice what they sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with non-believers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From c4b98010b614ee467c3bd72fe0a436e2fdbcf229 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 02:15:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 061/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 677e4198de..f4f6cd0539 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1345,6 +1345,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion οὖν…ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, they are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then? Food sacrificed to idols is nothing, and an idol is nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **food sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **food sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** exist or not. Alternate translation: “exists … exists” +1CO 10 20 skct figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὅτι 1 1CO 10 20 hvi0 figs-infostructure ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη…θύουσιν 1 Here Paul states the object before the verb. If your language would always put the object after the verb, you could rearrange this clause. Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles sacrifice what they sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with non-believers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From e3a60c2b1db0751cd6af687b0171fd835a0a962b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 02:28:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 062/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f4f6cd0539..b891fc4ada 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1347,6 +1347,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **food sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **food sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** exist or not. Alternate translation: “exists … exists” 1CO 10 20 skct figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὅτι 1 1CO 10 20 hvi0 figs-infostructure ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη…θύουσιν 1 Here Paul states the object before the verb. If your language would always put the object after the verb, you could rearrange this clause. Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles sacrifice what they sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 10 20 k6ha Θεῷ 1 Here, **God** could refer to: (1) any deity. Paul thinks that the **Gentiles** do not **sacrifice** to anything that can be called a **God**. Alternate translation: “to any god” (2) the God that Paul and the Corinthians worship. Alternate translation: “to our God” 1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with non-believers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 9cf92a6afd46a291dc2c73b18a3ae1af62d7a237 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 03:24:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 063/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b891fc4ada..75d9dd39fa 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1345,10 +1345,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 19 lxm3 figs-activepassive εἰδωλόθυτόν 1 Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “food that people have sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 19 l9t4 figs-rquestion οὖν…ὅτι εἰδωλόθυτόν τὶ ἐστιν, ἢ ὅτι εἴδωλόν τὶ ἐστιν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, they are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then? Food sacrificed to idols is nothing, and an idol is nothing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 19 tmkb τὶ ἐστιν -1 Here, **is anything** could ask about: (1) whether **food sacrificed idols** and **an idol** are significant or important. Alternate translation: “is significant … is significant” (2) whether **food sacrificed to idols** and **an idol** exist or not. Alternate translation: “exists … exists” -1CO 10 20 skct figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὅτι 1 +1CO 10 20 skct figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὅτι 1 Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply some from the previous verse ([10:19](../10/19.md)). Alternate translation: “Rather, I am saying that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 20 hvi0 figs-infostructure ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν τὰ ἔθνη…θύουσιν 1 Here Paul states the object before the verb. If your language would always put the object after the verb, you could rearrange this clause. Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles sacrifice what they sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 20 k6ha Θεῷ 1 Here, **God** could refer to: (1) any deity. Paul thinks that the **Gentiles** do not **sacrifice** to anything that can be called a **God**. Alternate translation: “to any god” (2) the God that Paul and the Corinthians worship. Alternate translation: “to our God” -1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **But** introduces a development in the argument. It does not introduce a strong contrast. If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with non-believers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων 1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons “It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons” From d290c89b6047dbc14f6f5b7f55909cadf2665e2b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 03:43:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 064/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 ++++-- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 75d9dd39fa..061712f5d5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1350,8 +1350,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 20 k6ha Θεῷ 1 Here, **God** could refer to: (1) any deity. Paul thinks that the **Gentiles** do not **sacrifice** to anything that can be called a **God**. Alternate translation: “to any god” (2) the God that Paul and the Corinthians worship. Alternate translation: “to our God” 1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **But** introduces a development in the argument. It does not introduce a strong contrast. If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with non-believers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy οὐ δύνασθε ποτήριον Κυρίου πίνειν, καὶ ποτήριον δαιμονίων 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Paul speaks of a person drinking from the same cup as the demon as evidence that that person is a friend of the demon. Alternate translation: “It is impossible for you to be true friends with both the Lord and demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 10 21 qwk7 οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης Κυρίου μετέχειν, καὶ τραπέζης δαιμονίων 1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons “It is impossible for you to be truly one with the Lord’s people and also with demons” +1CO 10 21 vgx5 figs-hyperbole οὐ δύνασθε…πίνειν…οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης…μετέχειν 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul states that they **are not able** to do both of these things, even though he knows that they can do both of these things. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that it is shocking and unthinkable to do both of these things. If your readers would misunderstand **You are not able**, you could express the idea with a strong command or a statement of how bad doing both these things would be. Alternate translation: “You should never drink … You should never partake of the table” or “It is very wrong to drink … It is very wrong to partake of the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy ποτήριον -1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 10 21 mxni figs-possession ποτήριον Κυρίου…ποτήριον δαιμονίων…τραπέζης Κυρίου…τραπέζης δαιμονίων. 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons +1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke to anger or irritate the Lord 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that we are not stronger than God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 9b0dee018856a15167806c2a6345f3fc7db0d975 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 03:47:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 065/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 061712f5d5..701db011f3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1351,9 +1351,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 20 snhh grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **But** introduces a development in the argument. It does not introduce a strong contrast. If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with non-believers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 vgx5 figs-hyperbole οὐ δύνασθε…πίνειν…οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης…μετέχειν 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul states that they **are not able** to do both of these things, even though he knows that they can do both of these things. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that it is shocking and unthinkable to do both of these things. If your readers would misunderstand **You are not able**, you could express the idea with a strong command or a statement of how bad doing both these things would be. Alternate translation: “You should never drink … You should never partake of the table” or “It is very wrong to drink … It is very wrong to partake of the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy ποτήριον -1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy ποτήριον -1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside **the cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If your readers would misunderstand **cup**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be in **the cup**. Alternate translation: “the drink … the drink” or “the wine in the cup … the wine in the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 mxni figs-possession ποτήριον Κυρίου…ποτήριον δαιμονίων…τραπέζης Κυρίου…τραπέζης δαιμονίων. 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons -1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **the table**. If your readers would misunderstand **table**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be on **the table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke to anger or irritate the Lord 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that we are not stronger than God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 5e4333935ae5e309f330d10fb6ecb426520a70c7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 03:50:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 066/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 701db011f3..8e99baf558 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1352,7 +1352,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 20 w8ep figs-possession κοινωνοὺς τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **partakers** who “partake in” **the demons**. This could refer primarily to: (1) “partaking” in or union with **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in the demons” (2) being joined together with non-believers, which comes from “partaking” in **the demons**. Alternate translation: “partaking in fellowship based on the demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 vgx5 figs-hyperbole οὐ δύνασθε…πίνειν…οὐ δύνασθε τραπέζης…μετέχειν 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul states that they **are not able** to do both of these things, even though he knows that they can do both of these things. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that it is shocking and unthinkable to do both of these things. If your readers would misunderstand **You are not able**, you could express the idea with a strong command or a statement of how bad doing both these things would be. Alternate translation: “You should never drink … You should never partake of the table” or “It is very wrong to drink … It is very wrong to partake of the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy ποτήριον -1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside **the cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If your readers would misunderstand **cup**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be in **the cup**. Alternate translation: “the drink … the drink” or “the wine in the cup … the wine in the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 10 21 mxni figs-possession ποτήριον Κυρίου…ποτήριον δαιμονίων…τραπέζης Κυρίου…τραπέζης δαιμονίων. 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons +1CO 10 21 mxni figs-possession ποτήριον Κυρίου…ποτήριον δαιμονίων…τραπέζης Κυρίου…τραπέζης δαιμονίων. 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe “cups” and “tables” that are associated with **the Lord** or with **demons**. The **cup** and the **table** would be used in ceremonies or worship connected to either **the Lord** or the **demons**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could state it in another way. Alternate translation: “the cup used to worship the Lord … the cup used to worship demons … of the table used to worship the Lord … of the table used to worship demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **the table**. If your readers would misunderstand **table**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be on **the table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke to anger or irritate the Lord From ae758ba81fc9264b37a90ef264f6c66e22469eb1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 03:56:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 067/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 8e99baf558..5cf4e98bf6 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1354,6 +1354,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy ποτήριον -1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside **the cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If your readers would misunderstand **cup**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be in **the cup**. Alternate translation: “the drink … the drink” or “the wine in the cup … the wine in the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 mxni figs-possession ποτήριον Κυρίου…ποτήριον δαιμονίων…τραπέζης Κυρίου…τραπέζης δαιμονίων. 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe “cups” and “tables” that are associated with **the Lord** or with **demons**. The **cup** and the **table** would be used in ceremonies or worship connected to either **the Lord** or the **demons**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could state it in another way. Alternate translation: “the cup used to worship the Lord … the cup used to worship demons … of the table used to worship the Lord … of the table used to worship demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **the table**. If your readers would misunderstand **table**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be on **the table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 10 22 nxv9 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [10:21](../10/21.md). If they do indeed participate in meals connected to the Lord and also meals connected to demons, they will **provoke the Lord to jealousy**. If **Or** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “If we do both of these things, do we not provoke the Lord to jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke to anger or irritate the Lord 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that we are not stronger than God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 984ee0823679089312ec22691e73383024e65b35 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 04:03:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 068/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 5cf4e98bf6..5421291300 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1356,8 +1356,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **the table**. If your readers would misunderstand **table**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be on **the table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 22 nxv9 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [10:21](../10/21.md). If they do indeed participate in meals connected to the Lord and also meals connected to demons, they will **provoke the Lord to jealousy**. If **Or** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “If we do both of these things, do we not provoke the Lord to jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 22 h9fh παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke to anger or irritate the Lord -1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that we are not stronger than God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke +1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 23 ped1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others. 1CO 10 23 tu2m πάντα ἔξεστιν 1 Everything is lawful This could mean: (1) Paul is answering what some Corinthians might be thinking, “Some say, ‘I can do anything’.” (2) Paul is actually saying what he thinks is true, “God allows me to do anything.” This should be translated as in [1 Corinthians 6:12](../06/12.md). 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα συμφέρει 1 not everything is beneficial “some things are not beneficial” From f388b3899afd8555ad8ed3413cb524c582f99231 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 13:36:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 069/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 5421291300..a2e4e3c11c 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”

In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Exodus

Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

### Eating meat sacrificed to idol

Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”\n\nIn this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nPaul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1354,8 +1354,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 21 dy2g figs-metonymy ποτήριον -1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside **the cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If your readers would misunderstand **cup**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be in **the cup**. Alternate translation: “the drink … the drink” or “the wine in the cup … the wine in the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 21 mxni figs-possession ποτήριον Κυρίου…ποτήριον δαιμονίων…τραπέζης Κυρίου…τραπέζης δαιμονίων. 1 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe “cups” and “tables” that are associated with **the Lord** or with **demons**. The **cup** and the **table** would be used in ceremonies or worship connected to either **the Lord** or the **demons**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could state it in another way. Alternate translation: “the cup used to worship the Lord … the cup used to worship demons … of the table used to worship the Lord … of the table used to worship demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **the table**. If your readers would misunderstand **table**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be on **the table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 10 22 nxv9 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [10:21](../10/21.md). If they do indeed participate in meals connected to the Lord and also meals connected to demons, they will **provoke the Lord to jealousy**. If **Or** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “If we do both of these things, do we not provoke the Lord to jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this question in their minds. Alternate translation: “You should know without me telling you that it is not right to make the Lord jealous.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 22 nxv9 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [10:21](../10/21.md). If they do indeed participate in meals connected to the Lord and also meals connected to demons, they will **provoke the Lord to jealousy**. If **Or** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “If we do both of these things, do we not provoke the Lord to jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 23 ped1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others. From 9f6e68e7def38eb8ea36329f9ef03b4ab542f87f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 13:38:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 070/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index a2e4e3c11c..573953f2ad 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1356,8 +1356,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 21 qwk7 figs-metonymy τραπέζης -1 You cannot partake of the table of the Lord and the table of demons Here the Corinthians would have understood **table** to refer to the food on **the table**. If your readers would misunderstand **table**, you could more explicitly refer to what would be on **the table**. Alternate translation: “of the bread … of the bread” or “of the food on the table … of the food on the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 10 22 nxv9 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [10:21](../10/21.md). If they do indeed participate in meals connected to the Lord and also meals connected to demons, they will **provoke the Lord to jealousy**. If **Or** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “If we do both of these things, do we not provoke the Lord to jealousy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke -1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **jealousy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “do we provoke the Lord to be jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not stronger than him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 23 ped1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others. 1CO 10 23 tu2m πάντα ἔξεστιν 1 Everything is lawful This could mean: (1) Paul is answering what some Corinthians might be thinking, “Some say, ‘I can do anything’.” (2) Paul is actually saying what he thinks is true, “God allows me to do anything.” This should be translated as in [1 Corinthians 6:12](../06/12.md). 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα συμφέρει 1 not everything is beneficial “some things are not beneficial” From 02c8c4dc40504d0aba8c4a1784e06fd40dc4485a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 13:53:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 071/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 573953f2ad..99b982eca3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1358,8 +1358,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **jealousy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “do we provoke the Lord to be jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not stronger than him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 23 ped1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others. -1CO 10 23 tu2m πάντα ἔξεστιν 1 Everything is lawful This could mean: (1) Paul is answering what some Corinthians might be thinking, “Some say, ‘I can do anything’.” (2) Paul is actually saying what he thinks is true, “God allows me to do anything.” This should be translated as in [1 Corinthians 6:12](../06/12.md). +1CO 10 23 ped1 πάντα ἔξεστιν 1 Connecting Statement: Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others. +1CO 10 23 tu2m πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT indicates that these claims are quotations by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood **All things {are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα συμφέρει 1 not everything is beneficial “some things are not beneficial” 1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up To **build up** people represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “not everything strengthens people” or “some things do not strengthen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” From 17259a7b991d34793b886cc83ab3aa9399d86408 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 13:56:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 072/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 99b982eca3..e05c486e80 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1358,10 +1358,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **jealousy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “do we provoke the Lord to be jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not stronger than him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 23 ped1 πάντα ἔξεστιν 1 Connecting Statement: Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others. 1CO 10 23 tu2m πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT indicates that these claims are quotations by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood **All things {are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1CO 10 23 ped1 πάντα ἔξεστιν 1 Connecting Statement: Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others. 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα συμφέρει 1 not everything is beneficial “some things are not beneficial” -1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up To **build up** people represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “not everything strengthens people” or “some things do not strengthen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable other believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From b0c8ab8a2dee7508a8b232cc5d645eed87539ec8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 14:04:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 073/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index e05c486e80..b2318daf90 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1358,10 +1358,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **jealousy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “do we provoke the Lord to be jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not stronger than him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 23 tu2m πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT indicates that these claims are quotations by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood **All things {are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -1CO 10 23 ped1 πάντα ἔξεστιν 1 Connecting Statement: Paul again reminds them of the law of liberty and doing everything for the benefit of others. -1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα συμφέρει 1 not everything is beneficial “some things are not beneficial” -1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable other believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 23 tu2m writing-quotations πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT indicates that these claims are quotations by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood **All things {are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα -1 not everything is beneficial Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things” +1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 85393f7687ac6f1f34752ef0370b4c5788cc1e9d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 18:35:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 074/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b2318daf90..f1bddf722d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1358,6 +1358,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 22 l8ik figs-rquestion ἢ παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον? 1 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we should not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong command. Alternate translation: “Do not provoke the Lord to jealousy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 22 h9fh figs-abstractnouns παραζηλοῦμεν τὸν Κύριον 1 provoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **jealousy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “do we provoke the Lord to be jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 22 zv17 figs-rquestion μὴ ἰσχυρότεροι αὐτοῦ ἐσμεν? 1 We are not stronger than him, are we? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, we are not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not stronger than him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 23 z31s figs-doublet πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα συμφέρει. πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ. -1 Everything is lawful Here, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul repeats **All things {are} lawful for me** to make two separate comments on the statement. By repeating **All things {are} lawful for me**, Paul emphasizes his qualifications or objections to this statement. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could state **All things {are} lawful for me** once and include both comments after that. Alternate translation: ““All things {are} lawful for me,’ but not all things {are} beneficial, and not all things build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 10 23 tu2m writing-quotations πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT indicates that these claims are quotations by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood **All things {are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα -1 not everything is beneficial Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things” 1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 2735b2192132559ed4cf942064953798be6b26d0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 18:47:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 075/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f1bddf722d..d505cf2e70 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1361,6 +1361,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 23 z31s figs-doublet πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα συμφέρει. πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ. -1 Everything is lawful Here, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul repeats **All things {are} lawful for me** to make two separate comments on the statement. By repeating **All things {are} lawful for me**, Paul emphasizes his qualifications or objections to this statement. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could state **All things {are} lawful for me** once and include both comments after that. Alternate translation: ““All things {are} lawful for me,’ but not all things {are} beneficial, and not all things build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 10 23 tu2m writing-quotations πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT indicates that these claims are quotations by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood **All things {are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα -1 not everything is beneficial Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things” +1CO 10 23 adry figs-explicit συμφέρει…οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything is beneficial Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All things {are} lawful**. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From dbe67315f8108985a7227f078641dd73bcfe0559 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 18:47:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 076/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d505cf2e70..49deb127cd 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1361,7 +1361,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 23 z31s figs-doublet πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα συμφέρει. πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ. -1 Everything is lawful Here, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul repeats **All things {are} lawful for me** to make two separate comments on the statement. By repeating **All things {are} lawful for me**, Paul emphasizes his qualifications or objections to this statement. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could state **All things {are} lawful for me** once and include both comments after that. Alternate translation: ““All things {are} lawful for me,’ but not all things {are} beneficial, and not all things build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 10 23 tu2m writing-quotations πάντα ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ -1 Everything is lawful In this verse, just as in [6:12](../06/12.md), Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT indicates that these claims are quotations by using quotation marks. If your readers would misunderstood **All things {are} lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘All things {are} lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα -1 not everything is beneficial Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things” -1CO 10 23 adry figs-explicit συμφέρει…οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything is beneficial Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All things {are} lawful**. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 23 adry figs-explicit συμφέρει…οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything is beneficial Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is not “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All things {are} lawful**. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From a242c8bab64e51abdd6a8984474163badae39596 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 19:50:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 077/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 49deb127cd..c44904c229 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1363,6 +1363,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα -1 not everything is beneficial Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things” 1CO 10 23 adry figs-explicit συμφέρει…οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything is beneficial Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is not “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All things {are} lawful**. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative μηδεὶς τὸ ἑαυτοῦ ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up +1CO 10 24 i6ek figs-gendernotations ἑαυτοῦ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **his** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or to **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up +1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 931883b6b548d5252bd6e035fc615d3aeaf5849e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 19:51:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 078/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index c44904c229..93d6432739 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1363,7 +1363,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 23 jm4k οὐ πάντα -1 not everything is beneficial Alternate translation: “only some things … only some things” 1CO 10 23 adry figs-explicit συμφέρει…οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything is beneficial Here Paul does not say to whom everything is not **beneficial** and who is the one who is not “built up.” He could be implying that it is: (1) other believers within the Corinthian community. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial to others … build others up” (2) the person or people who say that **All things {are} lawful**. Alternate translation: “{are} beneficial for you … build you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 23 ex6z figs-metaphor οὐ πάντα οἰκοδομεῖ 1 not everything builds people up Just as in [8:1](../08/01.md), Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one could **build up**. With this metaphor, he emphasizes that only some things help believers become stronger and more mature, just like building a house makes it strong and complete. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “not all things enable believers to grow” or “not all things edify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative μηδεὶς τὸ ἑαυτοῦ ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up +1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative μηδεὶς…ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 24 i6ek figs-gendernotations ἑαυτοῦ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **his** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or to **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) From 33e8f7ab05ec4399e83c51c6cea7c90a8e8953b2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 19:53:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 079/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 93d6432739..13a04e3556 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1366,7 +1366,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative μηδεὶς…ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 24 i6ek figs-gendernotations ἑαυτοῦ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **his** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or to **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If your readers would misunderstand **the other person**, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of any other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” From d25141a6542df7ec47694af53392524167b1fde2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 19:55:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 080/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 13a04e3556..67d4c732c7 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1366,7 +1366,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative μηδεὶς…ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up Here, Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 24 i6ek figs-gendernotations ἑαυτοῦ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **his** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or to **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If your readers would misunderstand **the other person**, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of any other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If your readers would misunderstand **the other person**, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” From 6da1d1062b8dbaa938fff80266c7d8bd28082069 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 20:50:27 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 082/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 41 ++++++++++++++++++++--------------------- 1 file changed, 20 insertions(+), 21 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 206e059ec1..916f1d533f 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -LEV front intro nxz4 0 # Introduction to Leviticus

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Leviticus

1. Instructions to the Israelites about offerings (1:1–6:7)
* Burnt offerings (1:1–17)
* Grain offerings (2:1–16)
* Fellowship offerings (3:1–17)
* Offerings for unintentional sins (4:1-5:13)
* Guilt offerings (5:14–6:7)
1. Instructions to the priests about offerings (6:8–7:10)
* Burnt offerings (6:8-13)
* Grain offerings (6:14-23)
* Sin offerings (6:24-30)
* Guilt offerings (7:1-10)
1. Further instructions to the Israelites (7:11–7:38)
* Peace offerings (7:11–21)
* Eating fat and blood forbidden (7:22-27)
* The share for the priests (7:28–7:38)
1. Setting apart the priests (8:1–10:20)
* Aaron and his sons ordained (8:1–36)
* Aaron as high priest (9:1–24)
* Nadab and Abihu punished (10:1–20)
1. Laws about clean and unclean things (11:1–15:33)
* Clean and unclean food (11:1–47)
* Women purified after giving birth to a child (12:1–8)
* Skin, clothing, houses (13:1–14:47)
* Bodily fluids (15:1–33)
1. Day of Atonement; the place of the offering; the nature of blood (16:1–17:16)
1. Setting apart for worship and service; being disqualified from service (18:1–24:23)
1. The years of rest and release (25:1–55)
1. Blessing for obeying and curses for not obeying (26:1–46)
1. Gifts to God (27:1–34)

### What is the book of Leviticus about?

In the Book of Leviticus, God continues to give laws through Moses to the people of Israel. The people were to obey all of these laws to honor their covenant with God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

“Leviticus” means “about the Levites.” The Levites were the tribe of Israel that provided priests and other workers in the tabernacle. If the people in the project language do not understand the term “Levites,” you can call it “The Book about the Priests” or “The Book about the Tabernacle Workers.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Leviticus?

The writers of both the Old and New Testament present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Leviticus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.

### What is the meaning of “holy” and “holiness” in the book of Leviticus?

These terms concern separating someone or something from the rest of the people, from the world, or from ordinary use. God separated these people or things so they would belong only to him. The people were to consider the places for worshiping God or for honoring him in any way as separate. The people could not use them for anything else. God required the Israelites to live in a certain way in order to live as a nation belonging to him alone.

Anyone or anything that was acceptable to God or “holy” was spoken of as if they were physically clean.

In the same way, anyone or anything that was not acceptable to God or not holy was spoken of if they were physically unclean.

Some people and some things could be made clean or “cleansed,” that is, acceptable to God. People or things were made clean if the people performed the right sacrifices and ceremonies. For example, some foreigners who wished to live among the Israelites and worship Yahweh could be made clean. However, other people and things could never be made acceptable to him.

It is important to know that not all unclean things or conditions were sinful. For example, after giving birth to a male child, a woman would be unclean for thirty-three days. Then the proper animal sacrifice would be offered for her. The flow of blood made the woman unclean ([Leviticus 12:7](../../lev/12/07.md)). But Leviticus never suggests that someone with a flow of blood was sinning. In the same way, God did not allow Israelites to eat many kinds of animals, as one way of setting his people apart.

Because God does not sin, the terms “holy” and “holiness” often suggest this same idea. Something belonging to God is holy. Because people must respect God, they must respect the things that belong to him.

### What are the important narrative features of Leviticus?

On seventeen occasions, the phrase “The Lord said to Moses” (and sometimes Aaron) is often used to begin paragraphs. God and Moses frequently spoke to others. The verb “speak” is used thirty-eight times.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Why did the Israelites need so many rules about sacrificing animals?

Leviticus shows that God is holy. That means God is very different from humanity and the rest of the created world. God does not sin. Because of this, it is impossible to be acceptable to him without being “cleansed.” The many kinds of sacrifices were meant to make people and things acceptable to God. However, the people had to continue making animal sacrifices so that they would continue to be acceptable to God. This was a sign that pointed to a need for a better sacrifice. They needed a sacrifice that would cause them to be acceptable to God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Why was the priesthood important in the book of Leviticus?

Priests were individuals who went to God on behalf of the people. God authorized the priests to bring the Israelite’s sacrifices to himself.

### How did the Israelite’s rules for worshiping God and sacrificing animals differ from the other nations at that time?

It was common for other nations to sacrifice animals to their idols. But, the other nations did other things to worship their false gods. For instance, people would sleep with prostitutes at the temple of their gods. They did this to try to persuade their gods to bless their land with the ability to grow crops. Also, people of other nations would sometimes offer human sacrifices to their gods. The God of Israel did not allow his people to do these kinds of things.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What important symbols are introduced in Leviticus?

Oil was poured on someone or something meant to be set apart for Yahweh. Water was used to symbolize the cleansing of someone or something so God could accept them. Blood was also used to cleanse and purify people and things. This is because blood represented life that needed to be shed in order for God to forgive people for sinning.

### Why do many sections begin with the phrase “Yahweh said to Moses?”

This phrase shows the reader that these rules come from God and must be obeyed. You could also translate this as “God told Moses.” +LEV front intro nxz4 0 # Introduction to Leviticus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Leviticus\n\n1. Instructions to the Israelites about offerings (1:1–6:7)\n * Burnt offerings (1:1–17)\n * Grain offerings (2:1–16)\n * Fellowship offerings (3:1–17)\n * Offerings for unintentional sins (4:1-5:13)\n * Guilt offerings (5:14–6:7)\n2. Instructions to the priests about offerings (6:8–7:10)\n * Burnt offerings (6:8-13)\n * Grain offerings (6:14-23)\n * Sin offerings (6:24-30)\n * Guilt offerings (7:1-10)\n3. Further instructions to the Israelites (7:11–7:38)\n * Peace offerings (7:11–21)\n * Eating fat and blood forbidden (7:22-27)\n * The share for the priests (7:28–7:38)\n4. Setting apart the priests (8:1–10:20)\n * Aaron and his sons ordained (8:1–36)\n * Aaron as high priest (9:1–24)\n * Nadab and Abihu punished (10:1–20)\n5. Laws about clean and unclean things (11:1–15:33)\n * Clean and unclean food (11:1–47)\n * Women purified after giving birth to a child (12:1–8)\n * Skin, clothing, houses (13:1–14:47)\n * Bodily fluids (15:1–33)\n6. Day of Atonement; the place of the offering; the nature of blood (16:1–17:16)\n7. Setting apart for worship and service; being disqualified from service (18:1–24:23)\n8. The years of rest and release (25:1–55)\n9. Blessing for obeying and curses for not obeying (26:1–46)\n10. Gifts to God (27:1–34)\n\n### What is the book of Leviticus about?\n\nIn the Book of Leviticus, God continues to give laws through Moses to the people of Israel. The people were to obey all of these laws to honor their covenant with God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\n“Leviticus” means “about the Levites.” The Levites were the tribe of Israel that provided priests and other workers in the tabernacle. If the people in the project language do not understand the term “Levites,” you can call it “The Book about the Priests” or “The Book about the Tabernacle Workers.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Leviticus?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testament present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Leviticus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.\n\n### What is the meaning of “holy” and “holiness” in the book of Leviticus?\n\nThese terms concern separating someone or something from the rest of the people, from the world, or from ordinary use. God separated these people or things so they would belong only to him. The people were to consider the places for worshiping God or for honoring him in any way as separate. The people could not use them for anything else. God required the Israelites to live in a certain way in order to live as a nation belonging to him alone.\n\nAnyone or anything that was acceptable to God or “holy” was spoken of as if they were physically clean.\n\nIn the same way, anyone or anything that was not acceptable to God or not holy was spoken of if they were physically unclean.\n\nSome people and some things could be made clean or “cleansed,” that is, acceptable to God. People or things were made clean if the people performed the right sacrifices and ceremonies. For example, some foreigners who wished to live among the Israelites and worship Yahweh could be made clean. However, other people and things could never be made acceptable to him.\n\nIt is important to know that not all unclean things or conditions were sinful. For example, after giving birth to a male child, a woman would be unclean for thirty-three days. Then the proper animal sacrifice would be offered for her. The flow of blood made the woman unclean ([Leviticus 12:7](../../lev/12/07.md)). But Leviticus never suggests that someone with a flow of blood was sinning. In the same way, God did not allow Israelites to eat many kinds of animals, as one way of setting his people apart.\n\nBecause God does not sin, the terms “holy” and “holiness” often suggest this same idea. Something belonging to God is holy. Because people must respect God, they must respect the things that belong to him.\n\n### What are the important narrative features of Leviticus?\n\nOn seventeen occasions, the phrase “The Lord said to Moses” (and sometimes Aaron) is often used to begin paragraphs. God and Moses frequently spoke to others. The verb “speak” is used thirty-eight times.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Why did the Israelites need so many rules about sacrificing animals?\n\nLeviticus shows that God is holy. That means God is very different from humanity and the rest of the created world. God does not sin. Because of this, it is impossible to be acceptable to him without being “cleansed.” The many kinds of sacrifices were meant to make people and things acceptable to God. However, the people had to continue making animal sacrifices so that they would continue to be acceptable to God. This was a sign that pointed to a need for a better sacrifice. They needed a sacrifice that would cause them to be acceptable to God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Why was the priesthood important in the book of Leviticus?\n\nPriests were individuals who went to God on behalf of the people. God authorized the priests to bring the Israelite’s sacrifices to himself.\n\n### How did the Israelite’s rules for worshiping God and sacrificing animals differ from the other nations at that time?\n\nIt was common for other nations to sacrifice animals to their idols. But, the other nations did other things to worship their false gods. For instance, people would sleep with prostitutes at the temple of their gods. They did this to try to persuade their gods to bless their land with the ability to grow crops. Also, people of other nations would sometimes offer human sacrifices to their gods. The God of Israel did not allow his people to do these kinds of things.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What important symbols are introduced in Leviticus?\n\nOil was poured on someone or something meant to be set apart for Yahweh. Water was used to symbolize the cleansing of someone or something so God could accept them. Blood was also used to cleanse and purify people and things. This is because blood represented life that needed to be shed in order for God to forgive people for sinning.\n\n### Why do many sections begin with the phrase “Yahweh said to Moses?”\n\nThis phrase shows the reader that these rules come from God and must be obeyed. You could also translate this as “God told Moses.” LEV 1 intro ecv8 0 # Leviticus 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In Hebrew, this chapter begins with the word “and” indicating a connection with the previous book (Exodus). The first five books of the Bible should be seen as a single unit.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Atonement

In order to offer a sacrifice for the people, the priest first had to make an atonement for himself, in order to make himself clean. Only then would he be clean and be allowed to perform a sacrifice. These sacrificed animals had to be perfect, the best of all of the animals. A person was not allowed to bring an inferior animal to be sacrificed to Yahweh. These sacrifices also had to be offered in a very specific way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]]) LEV 1 1 j8us יְהוָה֙ 1 Yahweh **Yahweh** is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this. LEV 1 2 yiq7 אָדָ֗ם כִּֽי־ יַקְרִ֥יב מִ⁠כֶּ֛ם 1 When any man from among you Alternate translation: “When any one of you offers” or “When any of you offers” @@ -928,31 +928,30 @@ LEV 22 31 x62z figs-doublet וּ⁠שְׁמַרְתֶּם֙ מִצְוֺתַ֔ LEV 22 32 nc63 figs-metonymy וְ⁠לֹ֤א תְחַלְּלוּ֙ אֶת־ שֵׁ֣ם קָדְשִׁ֔⁠י 1 And you must not profane my holy name Here the word **name** represents Yahweh himself and his reputation and **profane** means to remove the honor that belongs to God as Creator and Lord of the universe. Alternate translation: “And you must not dishonor me, for I am holy” or “And you must not dishonor my holy reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 22 32 dq3e figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִ֨קְדַּשְׁתִּ֔י בְּ⁠ת֖וֹךְ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 I must be treated as holy in the midst of the sons of Israel If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The people of Israel must treat me as holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 23 intro j29n 0 # Leviticus 23 General Notes

## Structure and formatting


## Special concepts in this chapter

### The feasts

The people should celebrate the Sabbath, the Passover, the Feast of First Fruits, the Feast of Weeks, the Feast of Trumpets, the Day of Atonement and the Feast of Booths. These feasts were important for the religious life of Israel. They were a part of proper worship of Yahweh and the identity of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/firstfruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]]) -LEV 23 2 v493 1 the appointed festivals for Yahweh These were festivals that the Lord had appointed times for. The people were to worship him at these festivals. Alternate translation: “the festivals for Yahweh” or “Yahweh’s festivals” -LEV 23 3 vk4w 1 the seventh day is a Sabbath of complete rest This is something the people must do habitually. After every six days in which they can work, they must rest on the seventh day. -LEV 23 3 t53y figs-metonymy 1 a holy assembly The requirement that people assemble to worship God on that day is spoken of as if that day were the assembly. Alternate translation: “a holy day, when you must assemble together to worship me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 23 4 l6ez 1 at their appointed times Alternate translation: “at their proper times” +LEV 23 2 v493 מוֹעֲדֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 the appointed times of Yahweh These refers to festivals that the Lord had **appointed** to happen on specific dates. The people were to worship him at these festivals. Alternate translation: “the festivals for Yahweh” or “Yahweh’s festivals” +LEV 23 3 vk4w וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י שַׁבַּ֤ת שַׁבָּתוֹן֙ 1 and on the seventh day is a sabbath of solemn rest The people must **rest** habitually on the **seventh day**. After every six days in which they can work, they must rest on the seventh day. +LEV 23 3 t53y figs-metonymy מִקְרָא־ קֹ֔דֶשׁ 1 a holy assembly The requirement that people assemble to worship God on that day is spoken of as if that day were the **assembly**. Alternate translation: “a holy day, when you must assemble together to worship me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 23 4 l6ez בְּ⁠מוֹעֲדָֽ⁠ם 1 at their appointed times Alternate translation: “at their proper times” LEV 23 5 nv3g translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן בְּ⁠אַרְבָּעָ֥ה עָשָׂ֛ר לַ⁠חֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 In the first month, on day 14 of the month The **first month** of the Hebrew calendar marks when Yahweh brought the Israelites out of Egypt. The fourteenth day is around the beginning of April on the Western calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]]) LEV 23 5 p2bw translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֗וֹן 1 In the first month The word **first** is the ordinal form of “one”. Alternate translation: “In month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LEV 23 5 bbn4 1 at twilight Alternate translation: “at sunset” +LEV 23 5 bbn4 בֵּ֣ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּ֑יִם 1 between the evenings Alternate translation: “at sunset” LEV 23 6 b47g translate-hebrewmonths וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 And on day 15 of this month Here, **this month** is the first month of the Hebrew calendar (verse 5). It was in the first month that Yahweh brought the Israelites out of Egypt. The fifteenth day is around the beginning of April on the Western calendar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) -LEV 23 7 z6ky 1 The first day you must set apart to gather together Alternate translation: “You must set apart the first day to gather together” or “You must treat the first day as different and gather together” -LEV 23 8 fd7s 1 will present a food offering They would present it to Yahweh by burning it on the altar. -LEV 23 8 eif1 figs-metonymy 1 The seventh day is an assembly set apart to Yahweh The requirement that people assemble on that day is spoken of as if that day were the assembly. Being set apart to Yahweh means that when they assemble, they must worship Yahweh. Alternate translation: “The seventh day is a day when you must assemble together to worship Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 23 11 l79v figs-activepassive 1 for it to be accepted If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for Yahweh to accept it” or “and I will accept it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 23 13 js1u translate-bvolume 1 two-tenths of an ephah An ephah is 22 liters. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) -LEV 23 13 awi9 translate-bvolume 1 a fourth of a hin A hin is 3.7 liters. Alternate translation: “one liter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) -LEV 23 14 ueu6 1 nor roasted or fresh grain Alternate translation: “nor cooked or uncooked grain” -LEV 23 14 ge4f 1 This will be a permanent statute throughout your people’s generations This means that they and their descendants must obey this command forever. See how you translated this in [Leviticus 3:17](../03/17.md). -LEV 23 16 aa6p translate-ordinal 1 seventh This is the ordinal for number seven. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] -LEV 23 17 wz93 figs-activepassive 1 made from two-tenths of an ephah. They must be made from fine flour and baked with yeast If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you have made from two-tenths of an ephah of flour and then baked with yeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 23 17 sd2q translate-bvolume 1 two-tenths of an ephah This is approximately 4.5 liters. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) -LEV 23 18 t6w3 figs-metaphor 1 producing a sweet aroma for Yahweh The Lord’s pleasure with the aroma represents his pleasure with the person who burns the offering. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will be pleased with you” or “that pleases the Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 23 22 cza3 1 When you reap the harvest of your land, you must not completely reap the corners of your fields Alternate translation: “When you gather your crops, do not gather them all the way to the edges of your fields” +LEV 23 7 z6ky בַּ⁠יּוֹם֙ הָֽ⁠רִאשׁ֔וֹן מִקְרָא־ קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֣ה לָ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 On the first day there will be a holy assembly for you Alternate translation: “You must set apart the first day to gather together” or “You must treat the first day as different and gather together” +LEV 23 8 fd7s וְ⁠הִקְרַבְתֶּ֥ם אִשֶּׁ֛ה 1 And you will offer an offering made by fire They would present the **offering** to Yahweh by burning it on the altar. +LEV 23 8 eif1 figs-metonymy בַּ⁠יּ֤וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִי֙ מִקְרָא־ קֹ֔דֶשׁ 1 On day seven is a holy assembly The requirement that people assemble on that day is spoken of as if that day were an **assembly**. Being **holy** means that when they assemble, they must worship Yahweh. Alternate translation: “The seventh day is a day when you must assemble together to worship Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 23 11 l79v figs-activepassive לִֽ⁠רְצֹנְ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 to be accepted for you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for Yahweh to accept it for you” or “and I will accept it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 23 13 js1u translate-bvolume שְׁנֵ֨י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֜ים 1 two-tenths of an ephah An **ephah** is 22 liters. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) +LEV 23 13 awi9 translate-bvolume רְבִיעִ֥ת הַ⁠הִֽין 1 a fourth of a hin A **hin** is 3.7 liters. Alternate translation: “a liter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) +LEV 23 14 ge4f חֻקַּ֤ת עוֹלָם֙ לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 It is a permanent statute throughout your generations This means that they and their descendants must obey this command forever. See how you translated this in [Leviticus 3:17](../03/17.md). +LEV 23 16 aa6p translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔ת 1 seventh The word **seventh** is the ordinal for number seven. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] +LEV 23 17 wz93 figs-activepassive שְׁ֚תַּיִם שְׁנֵ֣י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים סֹ֣לֶת תִּהְיֶ֔ינָה חָמֵ֖ץ תֵּאָפֶ֑ינָה 1 They must be two loaves of two-tenths of an ephah of fine flour. They must be baked with yeast If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “They must be two loaves of bread that you have made from two-tenths of an ephah of flour and then baked with yeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 23 17 sd2q translate-bvolume שְׁנֵ֣י עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים 1 two-tenths of an ephah An **ephah** is 22 liters. Two-tenths of an ephah is is approximately 4.4 liters. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) +LEV 23 18 t6w3 figs-metaphor רֵֽיחַ־ נִיחֹ֖חַ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 a sweet aroma for Yahweh The Lord’s pleasure with the **aroma** represents his pleasure with the person who burns the offering. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will be pleased with you” or “that pleases the Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 23 22 cza3 וּֽ⁠בְ⁠קֻצְרְ⁠כֶ֞ם אֶת־ קְצִ֣יר אַרְצְ⁠כֶ֗ם לֹֽא־ תְכַלֶּ֞ה פְּאַ֤ת שָֽׂדְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 And when you harvest the harvest of your land, you must not finish the edge of your field Alternate translation: “And when you gather your crops, do not gather them all the way to the edges of your fields” LEV 23 24 awp8 translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֜י בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֗דֶשׁ 1 In the seventh month, on day one of the month This is the **seventh month** of the Hebrew calendar. The first day is near the middle of September on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) LEV 23 24 im9z translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֜י 1 In the seventh month The word **seventh** is the ordinal form of “seven”. Alternate translation: “In month seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LEV 23 24 j9ft 1 a solemn rest a period of time that was only for worship and not for work -LEV 23 25 axe7 figs-activepassive 1 you must offer a sacrifice made by fire to Yahweh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must offer a sacrifice that you make by fire to Yahweh” or “you must burn an offering on the altar to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 23 24 j9ft שַׁבָּת֔וֹן 1 a solemn rest This was a period of time that was only for worship and not for work. +LEV 23 25 axe7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠הִקְרַבְתֶּ֥ם אִשֶּׁ֖ה לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 and you must offer a sacrifice made by fire to Yahweh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must offer a sacrifice that you make by fire to Yahweh” or “and you must burn an offering on the altar to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 23 27 b777 translate-hebrewmonths בֶּ⁠עָשׂ֣וֹר לַ⁠חֹדֶשׁ֩ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֨י הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה 1 on day 10 of this seventh month This is the **seventh month** of the Hebrew calendar. The tenth day is near the end of September on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) LEV 23 27 qtyo translate-ordinal לַ⁠חֹדֶשׁ֩ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֨י הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה 1 of this seventh month The word **seventh** is the ordinal form of “seven”. Alternate translation: “of month seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LEV 23 27 ei44 translate-unknown 1 the Day of Atonement On this day each year the high priest made a sacrifice to Yahweh so that Yahweh would forgive all the sins of the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “the Day of Sacrifice for Forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From 028ed7b2d40def17854e1baba44c01b15b9d2a58 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:06:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 083/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 29 ++++++++++++----------------- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 916f1d533f..b41f11d166 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -954,29 +954,24 @@ LEV 23 24 j9ft שַׁבָּת֔וֹן 1 a solemn rest This was a period of time LEV 23 25 axe7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠הִקְרַבְתֶּ֥ם אִשֶּׁ֖ה לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 and you must offer a sacrifice made by fire to Yahweh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you must offer a sacrifice that you make by fire to Yahweh” or “and you must burn an offering on the altar to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 23 27 b777 translate-hebrewmonths בֶּ⁠עָשׂ֣וֹר לַ⁠חֹדֶשׁ֩ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֨י הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה 1 on day 10 of this seventh month This is the **seventh month** of the Hebrew calendar. The tenth day is near the end of September on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) LEV 23 27 qtyo translate-ordinal לַ⁠חֹדֶשׁ֩ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֨י הַ⁠זֶּ֜ה 1 of this seventh month The word **seventh** is the ordinal form of “seven”. Alternate translation: “of month seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LEV 23 27 ei44 translate-unknown 1 the Day of Atonement On this day each year the high priest made a sacrifice to Yahweh so that Yahweh would forgive all the sins of the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “the Day of Sacrifice for Forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +LEV 23 27 ei44 translate-unknown י֧וֹם הַ⁠כִּפֻּרִ֣ים 1 the Day of Atonement On this day each year the high priest made a sacrifice to Yahweh so that Yahweh would forgive all the sins of the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “the Day of Sacrifice for Forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LEV 23 29 vh74 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֖ה מֵֽ⁠עַמֶּֽי⁠הָ 1 then he must be cut off from his people Being excluded is spoken of as being **cut off**. See how you translated this idea in [Leviticus 7:20](../07/20.md). Alternate translation: “then he must be cut off from his people as a branch is cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 23 29 yhns figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֖ה מֵֽ⁠עַמֶּֽי⁠הָ 1 then he must be cut off from his people If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then you must exclude him from his people” or “then you must separate that person from his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 23 30 a1cb 1 on that day Alternate translation: “on the Day of Atonement” -LEV 23 31 w1ug 1 This will be a permanent statute throughout your people’s generations This means that they and their descendants must obey this command forever. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Leviticus 3:17](../03/17.md). -LEV 23 32 vhl2 1 a Sabbath of solemn rest This is not the same as the Sabbath they observed every week on the seventh day. This was a special Sabbath on the Day of Atonement. -LEV 23 32 qw7i figs-explicit 1 you must humble yourselves In this case humbling themselves implies that they would not eat any food. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “you must humble yourselves and eat nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 23 32 jwy1 figs-explicit 1 the ninth day of the month This refers to the seventh month of the Hebrew calendar. The ninth day is near the end of September on Western calendars. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the ninth day of the seventh month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 23 32 q4wj 1 From evening to evening Alternate translation: “From sunset to sunset on the next day” +LEV 23 30 a1cb בְּ⁠עֶ֖צֶם הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה 1 on that very day Alternate translation: “on the Day of Atonement” +LEV 23 31 w1ug חֻקַּ֤ת עוֹלָם֙ לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 It is a permanent statute throughout your generations This means that they and their descendants must obey this command forever. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Leviticus 3:17](../03/17.md). +LEV 23 32 vhl2 שַׁבַּ֨ת שַׁבָּת֥וֹן הוּא֙ 1 It is a sabbath of solemn rest This is not the same as the Sabbath they observed every week on the seventh day. This was a special Sabbath on the Day of Atonement. +LEV 23 32 qw7i figs-explicit וְ⁠עִנִּיתֶ֖ם אֶת־ נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 and you must humble yourselves In this case humbling themselves implies that they would not eat any food. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “and you must humble yourselves and eat nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 23 32 jwy1 figs-explicit בְּ⁠תִשְׁעָ֤ה לַ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 on day nine of the month This refers to the seventh **month** of the Hebrew calendar. The ninth **day** is near the end of September on Western calendars. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the ninth day of the seventh month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 23 32 q4wj מֵ⁠עֶ֣רֶב עַד־ עֶ֔רֶב 1 From evening to evening Alternate translation: “From sunset to sunset on the next day” LEV 23 34 u83n translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֜ר י֗וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֤דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִי֙ 1 On day 15 of the seventh month This date is near the beginning of October on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) LEV 23 34 gg6x translate-ordinal לַ⁠חֹ֤דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִי֙ 1 of the seventh month The word **seventh** is the ordinal form of “seven”. Alternate translation: “of month seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LEV 23 34 by89 translate-unknown 1 Festival of Shelters This is a celebration during which the people of Israel lived in temporary shelters for seven days as a way to remember the time they spent living in the wilderness after they left Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LEV 23 35 vp3p 0 General Information: Yahweh is giving instructions for the Festival of Shelters. -LEV 23 37 ul95 1 These are the appointed festivals This refers to the festivals mentioned in 23:1-36. -LEV 23 39 i44i 1 Festival of Shelters This is a celebration during which the people of Israel lived in temporary shelters for seven days as a way to remember the time they spent living in the wilderness after they left Egypt. See how you translated it in [Leviticus 23:34](../23/34.md). +LEV 23 34 by89 translate-unknown חַ֧ג הַ⁠סֻּכּ֛וֹת 1 is the Festival of Huts This is a celebration during which the people of Israel lived in temporary shelters for seven days as a way to remember the time they spent living in the wilderness after they left Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +LEV 23 37 ul95 אֵ֚לֶּה מוֹעֲדֵ֣י 1 These are the appointed festivals This refers to the festivals mentioned in 23:1-36. LEV 23 39 s52d translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁה֩ עָשָׂ֨ר י֜וֹם לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 on day 15 of the seventh month This is the **seventh month** of the Hebrew calendar. The fifteenth day is near the beginning of October on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) LEV 23 39 fsue translate-ordinal לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 of the seventh month The word **seventh** is the ordinal form of “seven”. Alternate translation: “of month seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LEV 23 39 mz9z figs-synecdoche 1 when you have gathered in the fruits The word “fruits” here represents various kinds of crops. Alternate translation: “after you have gathered the crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LEV 23 40 br1c 0 General Information: Yahweh continues his instructions for the Festival of Shelters. -LEV 23 40 ven2 figs-explicit 1 branches of palm trees … willows from streams Possible uses for these branches are: (1) to make temporary shelters or (2) to wave them as part of their joyous celebration. Some translations state their use clearly; other translations leave it implicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 23 40 cnz9 translate-unknown 1 willows trees with long, narrow leaves, which grow near water (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LEV 23 42 w2iy 0 General Information: Yahweh continues his instructions for the Festival of Shelters. -LEV 23 43 ig75 figs-idiom 1 your descendants, generation after generation, may learn Here, **Generation after generation** is an idiom that refers to each generation that lives after another. Alternate translation: “your descendants belonging to all future generations may learn” or “all your descendants may learn forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 23 39 mz9z figs-synecdoche בְּ⁠אָסְפְּ⁠כֶם֙ אֶת־ תְּבוּאַ֣ת 1 when you have gathered the produce of The word **produce** here represents various kinds of crops. Alternate translation: “after you have gathered the crops of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LEV 23 40 ven2 figs-explicit כַּפֹּ֣ת תְּמָרִ֔ים וַ⁠עֲנַ֥ף עֵץ־ עָבֹ֖ת וְ⁠עַרְבֵי־ נָ֑חַל 1 branches of palm trees, and branches of leafy trees, and willows of the stream Possible uses for these **branches** are: (1) to make temporary shelters or (2) to wave them as part of their joyous celebration. Some translations state their use clearly; other translations leave it implicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 23 40 cnz9 translate-unknown וְ⁠עַרְבֵי 1 and willows of The **willows** are trees with long, narrow leaves, which grow near water. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LEV 24 intro hb64 0 # Leviticus 24 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Cursing God

The punishment for someone who curses God is to have stones thrown at him until he is dead. This was acceptable in ancient Israel, but it is no longer considered acceptable. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]]) LEV 24 1 s8ts 0 General Information: God gives Moses instructions about the things in the tent of meeting. LEV 24 2 d6z4 1 pure oil beaten from olives Alternate translation: “pure olive oil” From c068d3c9659ad0b30499dd95a20e5b032c6dd8a6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:27:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 084/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 67d4c732c7..3982800954 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1367,7 +1367,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 24 i6ek figs-gendernotations ἑαυτοῦ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If the meaning of **his** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or to **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If your readers would misunderstand **the other person**, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up +1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-explicit ἐν μακέλλῳ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul is speaking about **the market**, you could include a footnote to explain the context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 25 m6w7 figs-activepassive πωλούμενον 1 not everything builds people up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 87b6cca64e2166ad7461a640252c8372eb5320af Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:29:27 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 085/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 3982800954..f38a2ff6e8 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1369,7 +1369,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If your readers would misunderstand **the other person**, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-explicit ἐν μακέλλῳ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul is speaking about **the market**, you could include a footnote to explain the context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 25 m6w7 figs-activepassive πωλούμενον 1 not everything builds people up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul does not state what they are **asking** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking** about whether the food has been involved idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking about its origin” or “asking about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” From e5334efb636e0fa8d094d9bb64f20c2874829036 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:33:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 086/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f38a2ff6e8..0f63f8a159 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1370,7 +1370,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-explicit ἐν μακέλλῳ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul is speaking about **the market**, you could include a footnote to explain the context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 25 m6w7 figs-activepassive πωλούμενον 1 not everything builds people up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul does not state what they are **asking** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking** about whether the food has been involved idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking about its origin” or “asking about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) the **asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that the **asking** is **for the sake of conscience**, but they should not be worried about **conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From a48362368d01b6d918f130e103b7ef32435e67d9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:36:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 087/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 0f63f8a159..47a2992a1d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1371,6 +1371,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 25 m6w7 figs-activepassive πωλούμενον 1 not everything builds people up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul does not state what they are **asking** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking** about whether the food has been involved idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking about its origin” or “asking about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) the **asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that the **asking** is **for the sake of conscience**, but they should not be worried about **conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 25 crww writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the conscience** identifies the **conscience** of the person who is buying the food **in the market**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies the **conscience** as belonging to the person who buys the food. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From d19840d21a7953aafb6c03fce59aefae19db9a1d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:36:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 088/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 47a2992a1d..548a39f9a5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1371,7 +1371,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 25 m6w7 figs-activepassive πωλούμενον 1 not everything builds people up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul does not state what they are **asking** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking** about whether the food has been involved idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking about its origin” or “asking about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) the **asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that the **asking** is **for the sake of conscience**, but they should not be worried about **conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 10 25 crww writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the conscience** identifies the **conscience** of the person who is buying the food **in the market**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies the **conscience** as belonging to the person who buys the food. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 25 crww writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the conscience** identifies the **conscience** of the people who are buying the food **in the market**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies the **conscience** as belonging to the people who buy the food. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 92b7112e85d9376c08b461c6960fd0353f370d3b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:46:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 089/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 548a39f9a5..68e8d20a94 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1372,7 +1372,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul does not state what they are **asking** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking** about whether the food has been involved idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking about its origin” or “asking about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) the **asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that the **asking** is **for the sake of conscience**, but they should not be worried about **conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 25 crww writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the conscience** identifies the **conscience** of the people who are buying the food **in the market**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies the **conscience** as belonging to the people who buy the food. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 26 c1al figs-metaphor 1 not everything builds people up +1CO 10 26 c1al writing-quotations γὰρ 1 not everything builds people up In Paul’s culture, **For** a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 24:1](psa/24/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For the book of Psalms says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +1CO 10 26 l89d figs-quotations τοῦ Κυρίου γὰρ ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “For it says that the earth is the Lord’s, and the fullness of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +1CO 10 26 c5tk figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up +1CO 10 26 ib5g translate-unknown τὸ πλήρωμα 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 14d585a3ba8272bcd111093015c981df58c12a2f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:49:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 090/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 68e8d20a94..82d434e200 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1374,7 +1374,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 25 crww writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the conscience** identifies the **conscience** of the people who are buying the food **in the market**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies the **conscience** as belonging to the people who buy the food. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 26 c1al writing-quotations γὰρ 1 not everything builds people up In Paul’s culture, **For** a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 24:1](psa/24/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For the book of Psalms says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 10 26 l89d figs-quotations τοῦ Κυρίου γὰρ ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “For it says that the earth is the Lord’s, and the fullness of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -1CO 10 26 c5tk figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up +1CO 10 26 yi79 figs-infostructure τοῦ Κυρίου…ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here, the passage that Paul quotes includes a second thing that is **the Lord’s** after the **earth**. In the culture of the author, this was good poetic style. If your readers would misunderstand the structure, you could put **the earth** and **the fullness of it** together. Alternate translation: “the earth and the fullness of it are the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 10 26 c5tk figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “and the fullness of it is also the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 26 ib5g translate-unknown τὸ πλήρωμα 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From a39f176546bc5a9ec34f4e27abcc00322ddcda87 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 21:56:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 091/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 82d434e200..9d971e467f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1374,9 +1374,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 25 crww writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the conscience** identifies the **conscience** of the people who are buying the food **in the market**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies the **conscience** as belonging to the people who buy the food. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 26 c1al writing-quotations γὰρ 1 not everything builds people up In Paul’s culture, **For** a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 24:1](psa/24/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For the book of Psalms says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 10 26 l89d figs-quotations τοῦ Κυρίου γὰρ ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “For it says that the earth is the Lord’s, and the fullness of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -1CO 10 26 yi79 figs-infostructure τοῦ Κυρίου…ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here, the passage that Paul quotes includes a second thing that is **the Lord’s** after the **earth**. In the culture of the author, this was good poetic style. If your readers would misunderstand the structure, you could put **the earth** and **the fullness of it** together. Alternate translation: “the earth and the fullness of it are the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 10 26 yi79 figs-infostructure τοῦ Κυρίου…ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here, the passage that Paul quotes includes a second thing that is **the Lord’s** after the **earth**. In the author’s culture, this was good poetic style. If your readers would misunderstand the structure, you could put **the earth** and **the fullness of it** together. Alternate translation: “the earth and the fullness of it are the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 26 c5tk figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “and the fullness of it is also the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 10 26 ib5g translate-unknown τὸ πλήρωμα 1 not everything builds people up (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 26 ib5g translate-unknown τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here, **fullness** refers to everything that is connected with **the earth**, including people, animals, natural resources, and anything else that goes with **the earth**. Use a natural way to refer to everything connected with **the earth** in your language. Alternate translation: “everything in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From d87419a913c24e0ef539cf0976e68717980f6c64 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 22:21:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 092/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 9d971e467f..13f1420f06 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1377,6 +1377,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 26 yi79 figs-infostructure τοῦ Κυρίου…ἡ γῆ, καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here, the passage that Paul quotes includes a second thing that is **the Lord’s** after the **earth**. In the author’s culture, this was good poetic style. If your readers would misunderstand the structure, you could put **the earth** and **the fullness of it** together. Alternate translation: “the earth and the fullness of it are the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 10 26 c5tk figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “and the fullness of it is also the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 26 ib5g translate-unknown τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here, **fullness** refers to everything that is connected with **the earth**, including people, animals, natural resources, and anything else that goes with **the earth**. Use a natural way to refer to everything connected with **the earth** in your language. Alternate translation: “everything in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 10 27 nbjw figs-hypo εἴ 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here Paul uses if to introduce a true possibility. He means that an unbeliever might **invite you** and **you** might **want to go**, or this might not happen. He specifies the result for if the unbeliever does **invite you** and if **you** do **want to go**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +1CO 10 27 i2f5 figs-explicit καλεῖ ὑμᾶς 1 you without asking questions of conscience (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 27 krcv figs-idiom τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience +1CO 10 27 l2k8 figs-activepassive τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience 1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From f0ecab84585fad4cd8969e71112e5816f309abbf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 22:24:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 093/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 13f1420f06..d0e4b4d058 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1381,7 +1381,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 27 i2f5 figs-explicit καλεῖ ὑμᾶς 1 you without asking questions of conscience (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 27 krcv figs-idiom τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience 1CO 10 27 l2k8 figs-activepassive τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience -1CO 10 27 g31y ὑμῖν…μηδὲν ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience “you. God wants you to eat the food with a clear conscience” +1CO 10 27 g31y figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), here Paul does not state what they are **asking questions** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking questions** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking questions**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking questions**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking questions about its origin” or “asking questions about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 2b4cfe6f7352161f748cc198fd926d14c89a72ab Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 22:24:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 094/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d0e4b4d058..17642bc7bf 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1369,7 +1369,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If your readers would misunderstand **the other person**, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-explicit ἐν μακέλλῳ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul is speaking about **the market**, you could include a footnote to explain the context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 25 m6w7 figs-activepassive πωλούμενον 1 not everything builds people up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul does not state what they are **asking** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking** about whether the food has been involved idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking about its origin” or “asking about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 25 b93i figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul does not state what they are **asking** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking about its origin” or “asking about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 25 cnu1 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) the **asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that the **asking** is **for the sake of conscience**, but they should not be worried about **conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 25 crww writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the conscience** identifies the **conscience** of the people who are buying the food **in the market**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies the **conscience** as belonging to the people who buy the food. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 26 c1al writing-quotations γὰρ 1 not everything builds people up In Paul’s culture, **For** a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 24:1](psa/24/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For the book of Psalms says,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) From 74b878b083e72c2b22a4dbedb9f89e780e123871 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 22:26:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 095/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 17642bc7bf..90cf85afe5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1382,6 +1382,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 27 krcv figs-idiom τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience 1CO 10 27 l2k8 figs-activepassive τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience 1CO 10 27 g31y figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), here Paul does not state what they are **asking questions** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking questions** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking questions**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking questions**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking questions about its origin” or “asking questions about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 27 xnej grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) **asking questions**. In this case, Paul is saying that **asking questions** is **for the sake of the conscience**, but they should not be worried about **the conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking questions on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 0a80a2e7eb839d76f81ea784474e379d4b05d73a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 22:27:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 096/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 90cf85afe5..1756998186 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1383,6 +1383,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 27 l2k8 figs-activepassive τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience 1CO 10 27 g31y figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), here Paul does not state what they are **asking questions** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking questions** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking questions**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking questions**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking questions about its origin” or “asking questions about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 27 xnej grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) **asking questions**. In this case, Paul is saying that **asking questions** is **for the sake of the conscience**, but they should not be worried about **the conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking questions on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 27 pqsl writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here,**the conscience** identifies **the conscience** of the people who are eating with **unbelievers**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies **the conscience** as belonging to the person who is eating with **unbelievers**. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 98a7cf25c2080d37cf865d25de9ce095f3c7c7bc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 22:35:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 097/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 1756998186..ce9c7f6cef 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1378,8 +1378,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 26 c5tk figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “and the fullness of it is also the Lord’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 26 ib5g translate-unknown τὸ πλήρωμα αὐτῆς 1 not everything builds people up Here, **fullness** refers to everything that is connected with **the earth**, including people, animals, natural resources, and anything else that goes with **the earth**. Use a natural way to refer to everything connected with **the earth** in your language. Alternate translation: “everything in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 27 nbjw figs-hypo εἴ 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here Paul uses if to introduce a true possibility. He means that an unbeliever might **invite you** and **you** might **want to go**, or this might not happen. He specifies the result for if the unbeliever does **invite you** and if **you** do **want to go**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -1CO 10 27 i2f5 figs-explicit καλεῖ ὑμᾶς 1 you without asking questions of conscience (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 10 27 krcv figs-idiom τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience +1CO 10 27 i2f5 figs-explicit καλεῖ ὑμᾶς 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here, Paul implies that the unbeliever “invites them” to eat at the unbeliever’s house. If your readers would misunderstand **invite you** by itself, you could clarify what the invitation is for. Alternate translation: “invite you to eat at their home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 10 27 krcv figs-idiom τὸ παρατιθέμενον ὑμῖν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here, **that is set before you** refers physically to a waiter or servant “setting” food on the table in front of the person eating. If your readers would misunderstand this way of speaking about the food that one is served, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “that is on the table” or “that they offer to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 27 l2k8 figs-activepassive τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience 1CO 10 27 g31y figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), here Paul does not state what they are **asking questions** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking questions** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking questions**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking questions**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking questions about its origin” or “asking questions about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 27 xnej grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) **asking questions**. In this case, Paul is saying that **asking questions** is **for the sake of the conscience**, but they should not be worried about **the conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking questions on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From 1e723caee582f008c6ac460e476d95dc0e5fce47 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 22:36:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 098/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index ce9c7f6cef..4128da9738 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1380,7 +1380,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 27 nbjw figs-hypo εἴ 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here Paul uses if to introduce a true possibility. He means that an unbeliever might **invite you** and **you** might **want to go**, or this might not happen. He specifies the result for if the unbeliever does **invite you** and if **you** do **want to go**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1CO 10 27 i2f5 figs-explicit καλεῖ ὑμᾶς 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here, Paul implies that the unbeliever “invites them” to eat at the unbeliever’s house. If your readers would misunderstand **invite you** by itself, you could clarify what the invitation is for. Alternate translation: “invite you to eat at their home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 27 krcv figs-idiom τὸ παρατιθέμενον ὑμῖν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here, **that is set before you** refers physically to a waiter or servant “setting” food on the table in front of the person eating. If your readers would misunderstand this way of speaking about the food that one is served, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “that is on the table” or “that they offer to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 10 27 l2k8 figs-activepassive τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience +1CO 10 27 l2k8 figs-activepassive τὸ παρατιθέμενον 1 you without asking questions of conscience If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that one of the “unbelievers” did it. Alternate translation: “that the unbeliever sets before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 27 g31y figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), here Paul does not state what they are **asking questions** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking questions** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking questions**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking questions**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking questions about its origin” or “asking questions about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 27 xnej grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) **asking questions**. In this case, Paul is saying that **asking questions** is **for the sake of the conscience**, but they should not be worried about **the conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking questions on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 27 pqsl writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here,**the conscience** identifies **the conscience** of the people who are eating with **unbelievers**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies **the conscience** as belonging to the person who is eating with **unbelievers**. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From e5bad0989ef73bc10bfef9e1a4df39e8bef8b416 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 22:58:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 099/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 4128da9738..7b3d5a51d6 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1384,7 +1384,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 27 g31y figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), here Paul does not state what they are **asking questions** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking questions** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking questions**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking questions**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking questions about its origin” or “asking questions about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 27 xnej grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) **asking questions**. In this case, Paul is saying that **asking questions** is **for the sake of the conscience**, but they should not be worried about **the conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking questions on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 27 pqsl writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here,**the conscience** identifies **the conscience** of the people who are eating with **unbelievers**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies **the conscience** as belonging to the person who is eating with **unbelievers**. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-you ἐὰν δέ τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Some translations put this verse, continuing to “and not yours” in the next verse, in parentheses because: (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-quotations ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “says to you that the food was offered in sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +1CO 10 28 mj66 figs-activepassive τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “Someone offered this in sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 28 ow9p figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sacrifice**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “This is sacrificed as an offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-you οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 and not yours Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From a0064967f4bc861c3cb58d8748e005ff41b31377 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 23:00:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 100/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 7b3d5a51d6..fb9d76857a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1386,7 +1386,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 27 pqsl writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here,**the conscience** identifies **the conscience** of the people who are eating with **unbelievers**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies **the conscience** as belonging to the person who is eating with **unbelievers**. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-quotations ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “says to you that the food was offered in sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 10 28 mj66 figs-activepassive τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “Someone offered this in sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 28 ow9p figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sacrifice**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “This is sacrificed as an offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 28 ow9p figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sacrifice**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “This is sacrificed” or “This is offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 28 htgx figs-explicit ἱερόθυτόν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Here, **offered in sacrifice** implies that the food was **offered** to an idol. If your readers would misunderstand this implication, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered in sacrifice to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-you οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 and not yours Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From 710f6f505db527ee62af348259273704274d16e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 23:03:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 101/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index fb9d76857a..c5b839e65d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1388,7 +1388,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 28 mj66 figs-activepassive τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “Someone offered this in sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 28 ow9p figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sacrifice**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “This is sacrificed” or “This is offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 28 htgx figs-explicit ἱερόθυτόν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Here, **offered in sacrifice** implies that the food was **offered** to an idol. If your readers would misunderstand this implication, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered in sacrifice to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 10 28 qi77 figs-you ὑμῖν εἴπῃ…μὴ ἐσθίετε…τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of the word **you** and the command **do not eat it** here are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +1CO 10 28 qi77 τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Alternate translation: “who told you about it” 1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-you οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 and not yours Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 k8xr ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 For why … conscience? Possible meanings for this question, along with the question in the next verse, are (1) The word **For** refers back to [1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md). Alternate translation: “I am not to ask questions of conscience, so why … conscience?” (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “As some of you might be thinking, ‘For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?’” From d39091210addf058ddb03197e472f123bb423fe6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 23:04:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 102/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index c5b839e65d..45b4329dd5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1389,6 +1389,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 28 ow9p figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sacrifice**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “This is sacrificed” or “This is offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 28 htgx figs-explicit ἱερόθυτόν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Here, **offered in sacrifice** implies that the food was **offered** to an idol. If your readers would misunderstand this implication, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered in sacrifice to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Alternate translation: “who told you about it” +1CO 10 28 qr1c figs-extrainfo τὴν συνείδησιν 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Here it is unclear whose **conscience** Paul is speaking about. If possible, preserve the ambiguity because Paul will explain whose **conscience** he has in mind in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-you οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 and not yours Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 k8xr ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 For why … conscience? Possible meanings for this question, along with the question in the next verse, are (1) The word **For** refers back to [1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md). Alternate translation: “I am not to ask questions of conscience, so why … conscience?” (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “As some of you might be thinking, ‘For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?’” From 6efeafdb80e1a2d824f270d3eaa8995db9a3860c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 23:07:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 103/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 45b4329dd5..98fcacf207 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1390,6 +1390,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 28 htgx figs-explicit ἱερόθυτόν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Here, **offered in sacrifice** implies that the food was **offered** to an idol. If your readers would misunderstand this implication, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “offered in sacrifice to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 28 qi77 τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Alternate translation: “who told you about it” 1CO 10 28 qr1c figs-extrainfo τὴν συνείδησιν 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Here it is unclear whose **conscience** Paul is speaking about. If possible, preserve the ambiguity because Paul will explain whose **conscience** he has in mind in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +1CO 10 28 f8mv translate-textvariants συνείδησιν 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you After **conscience**, some manuscripts include “For ‘the earth {is} the Lord’s, and the fullness of it.’” This seems to be an accidental repetition of [10:26](../10/26.md). If possible, do not include this addition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-you οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 and not yours Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1CO 10 29 k8xr ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 For why … conscience? Possible meanings for this question, along with the question in the next verse, are (1) The word **For** refers back to [1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md). Alternate translation: “I am not to ask questions of conscience, so why … conscience?” (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “As some of you might be thinking, ‘For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?’” From db9406e8d4d633cb559750f18eb1d4771116638a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 23:17:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 104/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 98fcacf207..03ee1840be 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1384,6 +1384,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 27 g31y figs-ellipsis ἀνακρίνοντες 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), here Paul does not state what they are **asking questions** about, since the Corinthians would have understood him without these words. He implies that they would be **asking questions** about whether the food has been involved in idol worship or not. If your readers would misunderstand **asking questions**, or if you need to provide an object for **asking questions**, you could explicitly state what Paul implies. Alternate translation: “asking questions about its origin” or “asking questions about whether someone has offered it to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 27 xnej grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνακρίνοντες διὰ τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Just as in [10:25](../10/25.md), **for the sake of conscience** could give the reason for: (1) **asking questions**. In this case, Paul is saying that **asking questions** is **for the sake of the conscience**, but they should not be worried about **the conscience** in this case. Alternate translation: “asking questions on account of the conscience” (2) why they can **Eat everything** **without asking**. In this case, Paul is saying that they should eat **without asking** because if they did ask, their **conscience** might condemn them. Alternate translation: “asking. Do this for the sake of the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 27 pqsl writing-pronouns τὴν συνείδησιν 1 you without asking questions of conscience Here,**the conscience** identifies **the conscience** of the people who are eating with **unbelievers**. If your readers would misunderstand **the conscience**, you could express the idea with a form that more clearly identifies **the conscience** as belonging to the person who is eating with **unbelievers**. Alternate translation: “your consciences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 28 vmvt figs-hypo ἐὰν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **someone** might tell **you** that the food is **offered in sacrifice**, or **someone** might not. He specifies the result for if the **someone** does tell **you**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1CO 10 28 q3zt figs-quotations ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “says to you that the food was offered in sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 10 28 mj66 figs-activepassive τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “Someone offered this in sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 28 ow9p figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο ἱερόθυτόν ἐστιν 1 But if someone says to you … do not eat … who informed you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sacrifice**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “This is sacrificed” or “This is offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From fb4111cf0fc042de44fd586012894257d66cf380 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 23:47:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 105/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 11 +++++++---- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 03ee1840be..d7bb614813 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1392,10 +1392,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 28 qi77 τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Alternate translation: “who told you about it” 1CO 10 28 qr1c figs-extrainfo τὴν συνείδησιν 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Here it is unclear whose **conscience** Paul is speaking about. If possible, preserve the ambiguity because Paul will explain whose **conscience** he has in mind in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 10 28 f8mv translate-textvariants συνείδησιν 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you After **conscience**, some manuscripts include “For ‘the earth {is} the Lord’s, and the fullness of it.’” This seems to be an accidental repetition of [10:26](../10/26.md). If possible, do not include this addition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1CO 10 29 v1d9 figs-you συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Some translations put these words, along with the words in the verse before this one, in parentheses because (1) The forms of **you** and **eat** here are singular, but Paul uses the plural form immediately before and after this sentence. (2) The words “For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?” in the next verse seem to build on “eat everything that is set before you without asking questions for the sake of your conscience” ([1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md)) rather than “the conscience of the other man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-you οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ 1 and not yours Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **your** here is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -1CO 10 29 k8xr ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 For why … conscience? Possible meanings for this question, along with the question in the next verse, are (1) The word **For** refers back to [1 Corinthians 10:27](../10/27.md). Alternate translation: “I am not to ask questions of conscience, so why … conscience?” (2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: “As some of you might be thinking, ‘For why is my freedom judged by another’s conscience?’” -1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “For you should know without me telling you that no one should be able to say I am doing wrong just because that person has ideas about right and wrong that are different from mine.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 29 v1d9 συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours +1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-ellipsis συνείδησιν…λέγω, οὐχὶ 1 and not yours (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 29 d0p8 writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 and not yours (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? +1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion εἰ ἐγὼ χάριτι μετέχω, τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “I partake of the meal with gratitude, so no one should insult me for that for which I gave thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 x2v5 εἰ ἐγὼ…μετέχω 1 If I partake If Paul is not quoting what some Corinthians might be thinking, the **I** represents those who eat meat with thankfulness. “If a person partakes” or “When a person eats” 1CO 10 30 n89t χάριτι 1 with gratitude “and thank God for it” or “and thank the person who gave it to me for it” From 7712a33f3a5aefe64cd25c616919236e8b1b9432 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Wed, 11 May 2022 23:55:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 106/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d7bb614813..24b028443f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1397,7 +1397,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 29 d0p8 writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 and not yours (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? +1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” 1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion εἰ ἐγὼ χάριτι μετέχω, τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “I partake of the meal with gratitude, so no one should insult me for that for which I gave thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 x2v5 εἰ ἐγὼ…μετέχω 1 If I partake If Paul is not quoting what some Corinthians might be thinking, the **I** represents those who eat meat with thankfulness. “If a person partakes” or “When a person eats” From 75ba26afe99e02e1b73736e3bbad95739c53abf6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 00:00:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 107/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 24b028443f..85a45ee654 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” -1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? +1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion εἰ ἐγὼ χάριτι μετέχω, τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “I partake of the meal with gratitude, so no one should insult me for that for which I gave thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 x2v5 εἰ ἐγὼ…μετέχω 1 If I partake If Paul is not quoting what some Corinthians might be thinking, the **I** represents those who eat meat with thankfulness. “If a person partakes” or “When a person eats” 1CO 10 30 n89t χάριτι 1 with gratitude “and thank God for it” or “and thank the person who gave it to me for it” From 7d2a257c56dc79e1c319b6c39090c3c49ae97cd1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 00:02:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 108/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 85a45ee654..7926e0b54b 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1396,8 +1396,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-ellipsis συνείδησιν…λέγω, οὐχὶ 1 and not yours (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 29 d0p8 writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 and not yours (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” +1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “my freedom is certainly not judged by another’s conscience.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion εἰ ἐγὼ χάριτι μετέχω, τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “I partake of the meal with gratitude, so no one should insult me for that for which I gave thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 x2v5 εἰ ἐγὼ…μετέχω 1 If I partake If Paul is not quoting what some Corinthians might be thinking, the **I** represents those who eat meat with thankfulness. “If a person partakes” or “When a person eats” From fda925fb4a8cb3683afd165b219437f10e364891 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 00:11:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 109/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 7926e0b54b..6938ae84df 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1392,10 +1392,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 28 qi77 τὸν μηνύσαντα 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Alternate translation: “who told you about it” 1CO 10 28 qr1c figs-extrainfo τὴν συνείδησιν 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you Here it is unclear whose **conscience** Paul is speaking about. If possible, preserve the ambiguity because Paul will explain whose **conscience** he has in mind in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 10 28 f8mv translate-textvariants συνείδησιν 1 says to you … do not eat … informed you After **conscience**, some manuscripts include “For ‘the earth {is} the Lord’s, and the fullness of it.’” This seems to be an accidental repetition of [10:26](../10/26.md). If possible, do not include this addition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1CO 10 29 v1d9 συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours -1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-ellipsis συνείδησιν…λέγω, οὐχὶ 1 and not yours (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 10 29 d0p8 writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 and not yours (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 10 29 v1d9 συνείδησιν δὲ λέγω, οὐχὶ 1 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours Alternate translation: “now the conscience I am talking about is not” +1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-ellipsis συνείδησιν…λέγω, οὐχὶ 1 and not yours Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If you need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “I mean.” Alternate translation: “when I say the conscience, I mean not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 29 d0p8 writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 and not yours Here, **the other person** is the one who spoke about how the food was “offered in sacrifice” in [10:28](../10/28.md). If your readers would misunderstand who **the other person** is, you could clarify to whom it refers. Alternate translation: “of the person who informed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? Here, **for** introduces further support for the point that Paul was making in [10:25–27](../10/25–27.md) about how “conscience” is not significant for eating food at someone’s house. This means that [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) interrupt the argument. For ways to mark this in your translation, see the chapter introduction. If your readers would misunderstand how **for** refers back to verse 27, you could add some words that clarify that Paul is returning to an earlier argument. Alternate translation: “In most cases, though,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “my freedom is certainly not judged by another’s conscience.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From a2c03583c5c0beb74486b7bd1392cada2ebc05b2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 13:43:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 111/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 ++++-- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 6938ae84df..614dba76bb 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1396,11 +1396,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 29 s1wk figs-ellipsis συνείδησιν…λέγω, οὐχὶ 1 and not yours Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If you need these words, you could supply a phrase such as “I mean.” Alternate translation: “when I say the conscience, I mean not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 29 d0p8 writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 and not yours Here, **the other person** is the one who spoke about how the food was “offered in sacrifice” in [10:28](../10/28.md). If your readers would misunderstand who **the other person** is, you could clarify to whom it refers. Alternate translation: “of the person who informed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 29 k8xr grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For why … conscience? Here, **for** introduces further support for the point that Paul was making in [10:25–27](../10/25–27.md) about how “conscience” is not significant for eating food at someone’s house. This means that [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) interrupt the argument. For ways to mark this in your translation, see the chapter introduction. If your readers would misunderstand how **for** refers back to verse 27, you could add some words that clarify that Paul is returning to an earlier argument. Alternate translation: “In most cases, though,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 10 29 dr73 figs-123person ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 For why … conscience? Here Paul begins speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. You can tell that this is why he uses the first person because of what he says in [10:33](../10/33.md). If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could clarify that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “my freedom, for example,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “my freedom is certainly not judged by another’s conscience.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion εἰ ἐγὼ χάριτι μετέχω, τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? The speaker wants the hearer to answer the question in his mind. Alternate translation: “I partake of the meal with gratitude, so no one should insult me for that for which I gave thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 30 x2v5 εἰ ἐγὼ…μετέχω 1 If I partake If Paul is not quoting what some Corinthians might be thinking, the **I** represents those who eat meat with thankfulness. “If a person partakes” or “When a person eats” +1CO 10 30 x2v5 εἰ 1 If I partake +1CO 10 30 b7n9 ἐγὼ…βλασφημοῦμαι…ἐγὼ 1 If I partake (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 n89t χάριτι 1 with gratitude “and thank God for it” or “and thank the person who gave it to me for it” 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” 1CO 10 33 hd2z τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible From 6dfe46b53087dd5a483e9e2a1910f17c99f1c13d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 13:44:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 112/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 614dba76bb..d19fdfc5f5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 30 x2v5 εἰ 1 If I partake -1CO 10 30 b7n9 ἐγὼ…βλασφημοῦμαι…ἐγὼ 1 If I partake (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 10 30 b7n9 ἐγὼ…βλασφημοῦμαι…ἐγὼ 1 If I partake Here Paul continues speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. You can tell that this is why he uses the first person because of what he says in [10:33](../10/33.md). If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could clarify that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “I, for example, … am I insulted … I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 n89t χάριτι 1 with gratitude “and thank God for it” or “and thank the person who gave it to me for it” 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” From a3d2821b6847cdf96cdc6ea9c7cbab6989a9c4fb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 13:57:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 113/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d19fdfc5f5..e964167cf5 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1400,10 +1400,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 29 d4q1 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως? 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “it should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “my freedom is certainly not judged by another’s conscience.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 29 ksog figs-activepassive ἵνα τί…ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “why does another’s conscience judge my freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 30 x2v5 εἰ 1 If I partake +1CO 10 30 x2v5 figs-hypo εἰ 1 If I partake Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might **partake with gratitude**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for if the person does **partake with gratitude**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1CO 10 30 b7n9 ἐγὼ…βλασφημοῦμαι…ἐγὼ 1 If I partake Here Paul continues speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. You can tell that this is why he uses the first person because of what he says in [10:33](../10/33.md). If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could clarify that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “I, for example, … am I insulted … I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +1CO 10 30 n89t figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 with gratitude 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 10 30 n89t χάριτι 1 with gratitude “and thank God for it” or “and thank the person who gave it to me for it” +1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that some other person did it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” 1CO 10 33 hd2z τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 9ed114aeaf23ead428bed85e50db4ae23e4293ad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 13:58:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 114/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index e964167cf5..9cfce71039 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 29 kbj4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλευθερία μου 1 why should my freedom be judged by another’s conscience? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “what I am free to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 30 x2v5 figs-hypo εἰ 1 If I partake Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might **partake with gratitude**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for if the person does **partake with gratitude**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1CO 10 30 b7n9 ἐγὼ…βλασφημοῦμαι…ἐγὼ 1 If I partake Here Paul continues speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. You can tell that this is why he uses the first person because of what he says in [10:33](../10/33.md). If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could clarify that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “I, for example, … am I insulted … I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -1CO 10 30 n89t figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 with gratitude +1CO 10 30 n89t figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 with gratitude If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gratitude**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “gratefully” or an adjective such as “grateful.” Alternate translation: “gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that some other person did it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” From 437dd9bc65f34c5b369af15a9d3e208008448719 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 14:00:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 115/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 9cfce71039..bf342f89c3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1403,7 +1403,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 30 x2v5 figs-hypo εἰ 1 If I partake Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that someone might **partake with gratitude**, or someone might not. He specifies the result for if the person does **partake with gratitude**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1CO 10 30 b7n9 ἐγὼ…βλασφημοῦμαι…ἐγὼ 1 If I partake Here Paul continues speaking in the first person in order to present himself as an example. You can tell that this is why he uses the first person because of what he says in [10:33](../10/33.md). If your readers would misunderstand the first person here, you could clarify that Paul is using himself as an example. Alternate translation: “I, for example, … am I insulted … I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 10 30 n89t figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 with gratitude If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gratitude**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “gratefully” or an adjective such as “grateful.” Alternate translation: “gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that some other person did it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” 1CO 10 33 hd2z τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible From 69d84a2a3da72058a70cd51bade92093b01e35dd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 14:26:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 116/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index bf342f89c3..27aa35aa4a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1405,6 +1405,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 30 n89t figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 with gratitude If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gratitude**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “gratefully” or an adjective such as “grateful.” Alternate translation: “gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that some other person did it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 10 31 ub3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” 1CO 10 33 hd2z τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 38fd72bf8be2cfad0fcff68553801cb29d5317be Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 14:37:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 117/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 27aa35aa4a..38086eec75 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1406,7 +1406,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that some other person did it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 31 ub3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 10 31 zmvv figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” 1CO 10 33 hd2z τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 49a917bc7d16e835d82829cd3fe785938a3bb07f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 14:44:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 118/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 38086eec75..7340832a20 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1406,7 +1406,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that some other person did it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 31 ub3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 31 zmvv figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” 1CO 10 33 hd2z τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible From e22938975fec28c9b036cabbc92453cfff2d2d9b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 14:45:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 119/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 7340832a20..1e113f819f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1405,7 +1405,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 30 n89t figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 with gratitude If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gratitude**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “gratefully” or an adjective such as “grateful.” Alternate translation: “gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that some other person did it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 31 ub3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1CO 10 31 ub3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Here, **Therefore** introduces the conclusion of what Paul has argued in [8:1–10:30](../08/01.md). If you have a way to introduce the conclusion to an entire section, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 31 zmvv figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” From 7bfc40422e19bfc3961a9f740edb950798d2a7f5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 14:53:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 120/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 51 ++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+), 28 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index b41f11d166..b29fd376b3 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -974,34 +974,29 @@ LEV 23 40 ven2 figs-explicit כַּפֹּ֣ת תְּמָרִ֔ים וַ⁠עֲנ LEV 23 40 cnz9 translate-unknown וְ⁠עַרְבֵי 1 and willows of The **willows** are trees with long, narrow leaves, which grow near water. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LEV 24 intro hb64 0 # Leviticus 24 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Cursing God

The punishment for someone who curses God is to have stones thrown at him until he is dead. This was acceptable in ancient Israel, but it is no longer considered acceptable. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]]) LEV 24 1 s8ts 0 General Information: God gives Moses instructions about the things in the tent of meeting. -LEV 24 2 d6z4 1 pure oil beaten from olives Alternate translation: “pure olive oil” -LEV 24 2 aa52 figs-explicit 1 the lamp This refers to the lamp or lamps in Yahweh’s sacred tent. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “the lamp in the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 24 3 f13k 1 Connecting Statement: God continues giving Moses instructions about the things in the tent of meeting. -LEV 24 3 wxd8 figs-synecdoche 1 Outside the curtain before the covenant decrees The phrase “covenant decrees” represents either the tablets that the decrees were written on or the box that the tablets were put in. These were kept in the very holy place, which was the room behind the curtain in the tent of meeting. Alternate translation: “Outside the curtain that is in front of the tablets of the covenant decrees” or “Outside the curtain that is in front of the box of the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LEV 24 3 cr1j 1 curtain This was a thick fabric hung as a wall. It was not like a light window curtain. -LEV 24 3 x78g 1 from evening to morning Alternate translation: “from sunset to sunrise” or “all night” -LEV 24 3 t1wc 1 This will be a permanent statute throughout your people’s generations This means that they and their descendants must obey this command forever. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Leviticus 3:17](../03/17.md). -LEV 24 5 k9ni 1 Connecting Statement: God continues giving Moses instructions about the things in the tent of meeting. -LEV 24 5 bwx9 translate-bvolume 1 two-tenths of an ephah This is about 4.5 liters. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) -LEV 24 6 e3he 1 the table of pure gold before Yahweh This table is in the holy place, which is before the most holy place. -LEV 24 7 u2eb 1 Connecting Statement: God continues giving Moses instructions about the things in the tent of meeting. -LEV 24 7 ixi1 figs-explicit 1 You must put pure incense along each row of loaves The incense was probably next to the loaves, rather than directly on the loaves. Alternate translation: “You must put pure incense next to the loaves in each row” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 24 7 v5k2 figs-explicit 1 as a representative offering What the incense would represent can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “to represent the loaves as an offering” or “to be an offering that represents the loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 24 7 c4tc figs-activepassive 1 This incense will be burnt for Yahweh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You will burn the incense for Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 24 9 x294 1 This offering Alternate translation: “This bread that is offered” -LEV 24 9 gj5v 1 for it is a portion from the offerings Alternate translation: “for they took it from the offerings” -LEV 24 9 c8b1 1 the offerings to Yahweh made by fire Alternate translation: “the burnt offerings to Yahweh” or “the offerings that you burn to Yahweh” -LEV 24 10 v13h 1 Now it happened This phrase marks a new section of the book. -LEV 24 11 uzp5 figs-parallelism 1 blasphemed the name of Yahweh and cursed God Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “blasphemed Yahweh by cursing him” or “said terrible things about Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LEV 24 11 x1rf translate-names 1 Shelomith This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LEV 24 11 y53u translate-names 1 Dibri This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LEV 24 14 br93 translate-symaction 1 All who heard him must lay their hands on his head They were to put their hands on his head to show that he was the guilty one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -LEV 24 15 rj6p figs-metaphor 1 must carry his own guilt Suffering for sin is spoken of if a person were to carry his guilt. Alternate translation: “must suffer for his sin” or “must be punished (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 24 16 uv4b figs-activepassive 1 must surely be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people must surely put him to death” or “the people must surely kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 24 17 mu9u figs-activepassive 1 he must certainly be put to death. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly put to death anyone who kills another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 24 18 pg7s figs-explicit 1 must pay it back How he would pay it back can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “must pay it back by giving him a live animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 24 18 x28q figs-idiom 1 life for life This is an idiom that means that one life would replace the other. Alternate translation: “one life to replace the other life” or “to replace the one that he killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 24 19 p3k7 figs-activepassive 1 it must be done to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must do to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 24 2 d6z4 שֶׁ֣מֶן זַ֥יִת זָ֛ךְ כָּתִ֖ית 1 pure beaten oil of the olive Alternate translation: “pure olive oil” +LEV 24 2 aa52 figs-explicit נֵ֖ר 1 the lamp This refers to the **lamp** or lamps in Yahweh’s sacred tent. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “the lamp in the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 24 3 wxd8 figs-synecdoche מִ⁠חוּץ֩ לְ⁠פָרֹ֨כֶת הָ⁠עֵדֻ֜ת 1 Outside the curtain of the testimony Here, **the testimony** represents either the tablets that the decrees were written on or the box that the tablets were put in. These were kept in the very holy place, which was the room behind the curtain in the tent of meeting. Alternate translation: “Outside the curtain that is in front of the tablets of the covenant decrees” or “Outside the curtain that is in front of the box of the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LEV 24 3 cr1j לְ⁠פָרֹ֨כֶת 1 the curtain of This **curtain** was a thick fabric hung as a wall. It was not like a light window curtain. +LEV 24 3 x78g מֵ⁠עֶ֧רֶב עַד־ בֹּ֛קֶר 1 from evening until morning Alternate translation: “from sunset to sunrise” or “all night” +LEV 24 3 t1wc חֻקַּ֥ת עוֹלָ֖ם לְ⁠דֹרֹֽתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 It is a permanent statute throughout your generations This means that they and their descendants must obey this command forever. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Leviticus 3:17](../03/17.md). +LEV 24 5 bwx9 translate-bvolume שְׁנֵי֙ עֶשְׂרֹנִ֔ים 1 two-tenths of an ephah An **ephah** is about 22 litres. This **two-tenths** is about 4.4 liters. Alternate translation: “four and a half liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) +LEV 24 6 e3he הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָ֥ן הַ⁠טָּהֹ֖ר לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 the pure gold table before the face of Yahweh This **table** is in the holy place, which is before the most holy place. +LEV 24 7 ixi1 figs-explicit וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֥ עַל־ הַֽ⁠מַּעֲרֶ֖כֶת לְבֹנָ֣ה זַכָּ֑ה 1 And you must put on the row pure incense The incense was probably next to the loaves, rather than directly on the loaves. Alternate translation: “And you must put pure incense next to the loaves in each row” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 24 7 v5k2 figs-explicit וְ⁠הָיְתָ֤ה לַ⁠לֶּ֨חֶם֙ לְ⁠אַזְכָּרָ֔ה 1 and it will be a memorial portion for the bread What the incense would represent can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “and it will represent the loaves as an offering” or “and it will be an offering that represents the loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 24 9 x294 וְ⁠הָֽיְתָה֙ 1 And it will be Alternate translation: “And this bread that is offered will be” +LEV 24 9 c8b1 מֵ⁠אִשֵּׁ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 from Yahweh’s offerings made by fire Alternate translation: “fro the burnt offerings to Yahweh” or “from the offerings that you burn to Yahweh” +LEV 24 10 v13h וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ 1 Now … went out This phrase marks a new section of the book. +LEV 24 11 uzp5 figs-parallelism וַ֠⁠יִּקֹּב בֶּן־ הָֽ⁠אִשָּׁ֨ה הַ⁠יִּשְׂרְאֵלִ֤ית אֶת־ הַ⁠שֵּׁם֙ וַ⁠יְקַלֵּ֔ל 1 And the son of the Israelite woman blasphemed the Name and cursed The words **blasphemed** and **cursed** mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “And the son of the Israelite woman blasphemed Yahweh by cursing him” or “And the son of the Israelite woman said terrible things about Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +LEV 24 11 x1rf translate-names שְׁלֹמִ֥ית 1 Shelomith **Shelomith** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +LEV 24 11 y53u translate-names בַּת־ דִּבְרִ֖י 1 the daughter of Dibri ** Dibri** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +LEV 24 14 br93 translate-symaction וְ⁠סָמְכ֧וּ כָֽל־ הַ⁠שֹּׁמְעִ֛ים אֶת־ יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־ רֹאשׁ֑⁠וֹ 1 And all the hearers must lay their hands on his head They were to put their **hands on his head** to show that he was the guilty one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +LEV 24 15 rj6p figs-metaphor וְ⁠נָשָׂ֥א חֶטְאֽ⁠וֹ 1 then he must bear his sin Suffering for sin is spoken of if a person were to carry his guilt. Alternate translation: “then he must suffer for his sin” or “then he must be punished (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 24 16 uv4b figs-activepassive יוּמָֽת 1 he must be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people must put him to death” or “the people must kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 24 17 mu9u figs-activepassive מ֖וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 he must certainly be put to death. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must certainly put him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 24 18 pg7s figs-explicit יְשַׁלְּמֶ֑⁠נָּה 1 must repay it How he would **repay it** can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “must pay it back by giving him a live animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 24 18 x28q figs-idiom נֶ֖פֶשׁ תַּ֥חַת נָֽפֶשׁ 1 life in place of life This is an idiom that means that one life would replace the other. Alternate translation: “one life to replace the other life” or “to replace the one that he killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 24 19 p3k7 figs-activepassive כֵּ֖ן יֵעָ֥שֶׂה לּֽ⁠וֹ 1 so it will be done to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must do the same to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 24 20 icn4 1 fracture for fracture, eye for eye, tooth for tooth These phrases emphasize that a person should receive the same harm he did to someone else. LEV 24 20 ls9h figs-idiom 1 fracture for fracture This refers to broken bones. Alternate translation: “broken bone for broken bone” or “If he breaks someone’s bone, one of his bones must be broken” or “If he breaks someone’s bone, they will break one of his bones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LEV 24 20 u64z figs-idiom 1 eye for eye This refers to eyes being seriously injured or gouged out. Alternate translation: “If he destroys someone’s eye, one of his bones must be destroyed” or “If he destroys someone’s eye, they will destroy his eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 11ab2db90edaab7996c709b4421df35150a7f3fc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 15:38:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 121/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 11 +++++------ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index b29fd376b3..879d8d96e0 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -997,12 +997,11 @@ LEV 24 17 mu9u figs-activepassive מ֖וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 he must certainly LEV 24 18 pg7s figs-explicit יְשַׁלְּמֶ֑⁠נָּה 1 must repay it How he would **repay it** can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “must pay it back by giving him a live animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LEV 24 18 x28q figs-idiom נֶ֖פֶשׁ תַּ֥חַת נָֽפֶשׁ 1 life in place of life This is an idiom that means that one life would replace the other. Alternate translation: “one life to replace the other life” or “to replace the one that he killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LEV 24 19 p3k7 figs-activepassive כֵּ֖ן יֵעָ֥שֶׂה לּֽ⁠וֹ 1 so it will be done to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must do the same to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 24 20 icn4 1 fracture for fracture, eye for eye, tooth for tooth These phrases emphasize that a person should receive the same harm he did to someone else. -LEV 24 20 ls9h figs-idiom 1 fracture for fracture This refers to broken bones. Alternate translation: “broken bone for broken bone” or “If he breaks someone’s bone, one of his bones must be broken” or “If he breaks someone’s bone, they will break one of his bones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 24 20 u64z figs-idiom 1 eye for eye This refers to eyes being seriously injured or gouged out. Alternate translation: “If he destroys someone’s eye, one of his bones must be destroyed” or “If he destroys someone’s eye, they will destroy his eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 24 20 gu8y figs-idiom 1 tooth for tooth This refers to teeth being knocked out of the mouth. Alternate translation: “If he knocks out someone’s tooth, one of his teeth must be knocked out” or “If he knocks out someone’s tooth, they will knock out one of his teeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 24 21 vq5t figs-activepassive 1 anyone who kills a person must be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they must put to death anyone who kills a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 24 23 jg5f 1 carried out the command Alternate translation: “obeyed the command” +LEV 24 20 icn4 שֶׁ֚בֶר תַּ֣חַת שֶׁ֔בֶר עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן שֵׁ֖ן תַּ֣חַת שֵׁ֑ן 1 fracture in place of fracture, eye in place of eye, tooth in place of tooth These phrases emphasize that a person should receive the same harm he did to someone else. +LEV 24 20 ls9h figs-idiom שֶׁ֚בֶר תַּ֣חַת שֶׁ֔בֶר 1 fracture in place of fracture A **fracture** refers to broken bones. Alternate translation: “broken bone for broken bone” or “if he breaks someone’s bone, one of his bones must be broken” or “if he breaks someone’s bone, they will break one of his bones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 24 20 u64z figs-idiom עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן 1 eye in place of eye This refers to an **eye** being seriously injured or gouged out. Alternate translation: “if he destroys someone’s eye, one of his bones must be destroyed” or “if he destroys someone’s eye, they will destroy his eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 24 20 gu8y figs-idiom שֵׁ֖ן תַּ֣חַת שֵׁ֑ן 1 tooth in place of tooth This refers to a **tooth** being knocked out of the mouth. Alternate translation: “if he knocks out someone’s tooth, one of his teeth must be knocked out” or “if he knocks out someone’s tooth, they will knock out one of his teeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 24 21 vq5t figs-activepassive וּ⁠מַכֵּ֥ה אָדָ֖ם יוּמָֽת 1 And he who strikes dead a human must be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they must put to death anyone who kills a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 25 intro z6ra 0 # Leviticus 25 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Over-farming

There is a provision made in this chapter to prevent over-farming of the land. If a land is farmed every year with the same crops, it will quickly become unable to grow anything.

### Sabbath and Jubilee Years

Every seventh year, the land should not be planted. Every fiftieth year Israelite slaves must be freed and all land that has been bought returned to its original owners. This prevented people from getting trapped by their poverty. LEV 25 2 e4st figs-personification וְ⁠שָׁבְתָ֣ה הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ שַׁבָּ֖ת לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 then the land must keep a sabbath, a sabbath for Yahweh The **land** is spoken of as if it were a person that could obey the Sabbath by resting. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LEV 25 2 id1e figs-metaphor וְ⁠שָׁבְתָ֣ה הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ שַׁבָּ֖ת לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 then the land must keep a sabbath, a sabbath for Yahweh Here the people honoring God by not farming the **land** every seventh year is spoken of as if the land were taking a sabbath rest. Alternate translation: “you must let the land rest every seventh year to honor Yahweh” or “you must obey Yahweh’s Sabbath by not farming the land every seventh year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 38da41779eacb3afc2859a51fce524251c356326 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 16:14:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 122/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 1e113f819f..f46282b4a9 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1408,7 +1408,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 31 ub3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Here, **Therefore** introduces the conclusion of what Paul has argued in [8:1–10:30](../08/01.md). If you have a way to introduce the conclusion to an entire section, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 31 zmvv figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 32 ag47 ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks “Do not displease Jews or Greeks” or “Do not make Jews or Greeks angry” +1CO 10 32 sj34 figs-abstractnouns ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “offend.” Alternate translation: “Do not offend either Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 10 32 ag47 figs-explicit καὶ Ἰουδαίοις…καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If your readers would misunderstand these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out, you could clarify that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 33 hd2z τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 1 h5fg 0 Connecting Statement: After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers. From f75bf2efc7959cbb0b1ac7bf77f4283f3d8f49aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 16:35:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 123/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f46282b4a9..55d334d9b2 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1410,7 +1410,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 31 zmvv figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 sj34 figs-abstractnouns ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “offend.” Alternate translation: “Do not offend either Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 figs-explicit καὶ Ἰουδαίοις…καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If your readers would misunderstand these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out, you could clarify that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 10 33 hd2z τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible +1CO 10 33 rjyz figs-possession τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον…τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Here Paul speaks of a **benefit** that belongs to him or to **many** others. By this, he refers to what is a **benefit** for himself or for the **many** others. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could clarify that the **benefit** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is a benefit for myself but what is a benefit for the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 33 hd2z figs-nominaladj τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of many people” or “of everyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 1 h5fg 0 Connecting Statement: After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers. 1CO 11 2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 you remember me in everything “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them. From 927731f7ff95064a4dbad686205f185f4f3a1dc8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 16:37:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 124/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 55d334d9b2..8dc5a97c4c 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1412,6 +1412,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 32 ag47 figs-explicit καὶ Ἰουδαίοις…καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If your readers would misunderstand these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out, you could clarify that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 33 rjyz figs-possession τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον…τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Here Paul speaks of a **benefit** that belongs to him or to **many** others. By this, he refers to what is a **benefit** for himself or for the **many** others. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could clarify that the **benefit** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is a benefit for myself but what is a benefit for the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 33 hd2z figs-nominaladj τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of many people” or “of everyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1CO 10 33 qsg4 figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 the many If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 1 h5fg 0 Connecting Statement: After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers. 1CO 11 2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 you remember me in everything “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them. From eb14cd58ae30fc9a119fabe27c51f32abe46805e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 16:39:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 125/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 8dc5a97c4c..9e6f4d764a 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1411,6 +1411,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 32 sj34 figs-abstractnouns ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “offend.” Alternate translation: “Do not offend either Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 figs-explicit καὶ Ἰουδαίοις…καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If your readers would misunderstand these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out, you could clarify that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 33 rjyz figs-possession τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον…τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Here Paul speaks of a **benefit** that belongs to him or to **many** others. By this, he refers to what is a **benefit** for himself or for the **many** others. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could clarify that the **benefit** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is a benefit for myself but what is a benefit for the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 10 33 k86v figs-abstractnouns τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον, ἀλλὰ τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **benefit**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “benefit.” Alternate translation: “what benefits me but what benefits the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 33 hd2z figs-nominaladj τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of many people” or “of everyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 10 33 qsg4 figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 the many If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From ebe1c56641c91ea1c00471b9fa3ad9d7f8761fee Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 16:55:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 127/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 9e6f4d764a..b545f0007b 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians

1. Opening (1:1–9)
2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)
4. On abstinence (7:1–40)
5. On food (8:1–11:1)
6. On head coverings (11:2–16)
7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)
9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)
10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)
11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?

Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?

1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?

Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What do “knowledge” and “wisdom” mean in 1 Corinthians?

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What is the meaning of “flesh?”

Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.

* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)
* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.
* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)
* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”
* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians\n\n1. Opening (1:1–9)\n2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)\n3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)\n4. On abstinence (7:1–40)\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n6. On head coverings (11:2–16)\n7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)\n8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)\n9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)\n10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)\n11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.\n\n### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?\n\n1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Corinth like?\n\nCorinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.\n\n### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?\n\nMany animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What do “knowledge” and “wisdom” mean in 1 Corinthians?\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:\n\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)\n* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### What is the meaning of “flesh?”\n\nPaul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.\n\n* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)\n* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.\n* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)\n* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”\n* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Opening (1:1–9)
* Greetings and Blessing (1:1–3)
* Praise and Prayer (1:4–9)
2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
* Divisions, Leaders, and Baptism (1:10–17)
* Wisdom, Foolishness, and Boasting (1:18–31)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Disunity

In this chapter, Paul urges the Corinthians to stop dividing up into smaller groups that identify themselves with one specific leader. He mentions some of the leaders, including himself, in [1:12](../01/12.md). The Corinthians probably chose these leaders themselves, since there is no evidence that any of the people mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) were trying to create their own groups. People in the Corinthian church were probably trying to sound wiser or more powerful than other people, so they would choose a group and a leader and say they were better than others. Paul argues against these kinds of divisions first, and then he argues against anyone who tries to sound wiser and more powerful than others.

### Wisdom and foolishness

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both wisdom and foolishness. These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])

### Power and weakness

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both power and weakness. These words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors about Christ

In this chapter, Paul says that “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” ([1:24](../01/24.md)) and that Christ “was made for us wisdom from God, righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption” ([1:30](../01/30.md)). With these two verses, Paul is not saying that Christ is no longer a person and is instead these abstract ideas. Rather, Paul is speaking in this way because Christ and his work for believers include all of these abstract ideas. Christ’s work is powerful and wise, and gives those who believe in him wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption. For ways to translate these two statements, see the notes on these two verses.

### Rhetorical questions

Paul asks many questions in this chapter. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.

### Using different perspectives

Sometimes, Paul speaks of God as if God were “foolish” and “weak” ([1:25](../01/25.md)) and as if he chose “foolish” and “weak” things ([1:27](../01/27.md)). Paul does not actually think that God is foolish and weak and chooses foolish and weak things. Rather, he is speaking from the perspective of normal human thinking. What God does, from a human perspective, is “weak” and “foolish.” He makes this clear in several verses. For example, in [1:26](../01/26.md), Paul says that most of the Corinthians were not wise “according to the flesh.” This is Paul’s way of saying that they were not wise according to human thinking. If possible translate the times Paul speaks from a human perspective with the same words he uses for “weakness” and “foolishness” when he speaks from God’s perspective. If it is necessary to distinguish these uses, use a word or phrase that explains which perspective Paul is using. He does this himself sometimes, and if it is necessary, you can do it in other places as well.

### Information presented out of order

The ULT puts parentheses around [1:16](../01/16.md) because Paul is speaking about whom he baptized, an idea that fits logically with [1:14](../01/14.md) and not as well after [1:15](../01/15.md). Paul has remembered someone else that he baptized, and instead of going back and putting that information in [1:14](../01/14.md), he includes it in [1:16](../01/16.md), interrupting the flow of the argument. If possible, keep [1:16](../01/16.md) where it is, and use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is interrupting his argument. If there is no way to do this in your language, you could move it between [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1:15](../01/15.md). 1CO 1 1 m3dd figs-exclusive 0 General Information Throughout this letter the words “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include the Corinthian believers unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 1 1 lihg figs-yousingular 0 General Information The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Corinthians believers and so are plural unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 8-10 together answer the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”\n\nIn this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord’s Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nPaul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nPaul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From f8ec1b558664c72b55582b69ae5e3166e1735cb8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 16:58:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 128/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index b545f0007b..6456caaa79 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nPaul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 8aee8190e9c33f05df206b75c6b487c91ddf22fe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 16:59:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 129/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 6456caaa79..5047bbe586 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From d97d2e10fc7c8047b865d6c6acbe5032e0a91b94 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 17:46:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 130/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 45 ++++++++++++++++++--------------------------- 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 27 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 879d8d96e0..bf273dcb0c 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1005,37 +1005,28 @@ LEV 24 21 vq5t figs-activepassive וּ⁠מַכֵּ֥ה אָדָ֖ם יוּמָ LEV 25 intro z6ra 0 # Leviticus 25 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Over-farming

There is a provision made in this chapter to prevent over-farming of the land. If a land is farmed every year with the same crops, it will quickly become unable to grow anything.

### Sabbath and Jubilee Years

Every seventh year, the land should not be planted. Every fiftieth year Israelite slaves must be freed and all land that has been bought returned to its original owners. This prevented people from getting trapped by their poverty. LEV 25 2 e4st figs-personification וְ⁠שָׁבְתָ֣ה הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ שַׁבָּ֖ת לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 then the land must keep a sabbath, a sabbath for Yahweh The **land** is spoken of as if it were a person that could obey the Sabbath by resting. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LEV 25 2 id1e figs-metaphor וְ⁠שָׁבְתָ֣ה הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ שַׁבָּ֖ת לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 then the land must keep a sabbath, a sabbath for Yahweh Here the people honoring God by not farming the **land** every seventh year is spoken of as if the land were taking a sabbath rest. Alternate translation: “you must let the land rest every seventh year to honor Yahweh” or “you must obey Yahweh’s Sabbath by not farming the land every seventh year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 25 3 bf66 1 prune your vineyard To prune a vineyard is to cut the branches and vines to help the fruit grow better. +LEV 25 3 bf66 תִּזְמֹ֣ר כַּרְמֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 you must prune your vineyard To **prune** a **vineyard** is to cut the branches and vines to help the fruit grow better. LEV 25 4 dc2m figs-metaphor שַׁבַּ֤ת שַׁבָּתוֹן֙ יִהְיֶ֣ה לָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ 1 there must be a sabbath of solemn rest for the land Not farming the land is spoken of as letting **the land** **rest**. Alternate translation: “you must observe a Sabbath of solemn rest for the land by not farming it” or “you must obey the Sabbath law by not farming the land every seventh year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 25 5 jtb8 1 You must not conduct … for the land Yahweh will not allow the owner of a field to organize his workers and harvest the land as he does the other six years. However, Yahweh will allow individuals to go through the fields to pick and eat the fruit they find. -LEV 25 5 mxc6 figs-activepassive 1 your unpruned vines This means that no one has taken care of the vines and cut them as they do during the other six years. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “your vines that you do not prune” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 6 ixl4 1 Whatever the unworked land … who live with you may gather food Yahweh will not allow the owner of a field to organize his workers and harvest the land as he does the other six years. However, Yahweh will allow individuals to go through the fields to pick and eat the fruit they find. -LEV 25 6 h8qg 1 Whatever the unworked land grows Alternate translation: “whatever grows on the unworked land” -LEV 25 6 itc3 figs-activepassive 1 the unworked land This means that no one has taken care of the gardens or farms as they do during the other six years. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “your gardens that you do not tend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 7 v4ie 1 whatever the land produces Alternate translation: “whatever grows on the land” -LEV 25 8 g6u6 1 there will be seven Sabbaths of years Alternate translation: “they will be seven sets of seven years” +LEV 25 5 jtb8 אֵ֣ת סְפִ֤יחַ קְצִֽירְ⁠ךָ֙ לֹ֣א תִקְצ֔וֹר וְ⁠אֶת־ עִנְּבֵ֥י נְזִירֶ֖⁠ךָ לֹ֣א תִבְצֹ֑ר 1 You must not harvest the second growth of your harvest and you must not gather the grapes of your unpruned vines Yahweh will not allow the owner of a field to organize his workers and harvest the land as he does the other six years. However, Yahweh will allow individuals to go through the fields to pick and eat the fruit they find. +LEV 25 5 mxc6 figs-activepassive נְזִירֶ֖⁠ךָ 1 your unpruned vines To be **unpruned** means that no one has taken care of the **vines** and cut them as they do during the other six years. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “your vines that you do not prune” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 6 ixl4 וְ֠⁠הָיְתָה שַׁבַּ֨ת הָ⁠אָ֤רֶץ לָ⁠כֶם֙ לְ⁠אָכְלָ֔ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ וּ⁠לְ⁠עַבְדְּ⁠ךָ֣ וְ⁠לַ⁠אֲמָתֶ֑⁠ךָ וְ⁠לִ⁠שְׂכִֽירְ⁠ךָ֙ וּ⁠לְ⁠תוֹשָׁ֣בְ⁠ךָ֔ הַ⁠גָּרִ֖ים עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 And the sabbath of the land will be for you, as food for you, and for your male slave, and for your female slave, and for your hired servant, and for the foreign resident who is sojourning with you Yahweh will not allow the owner of a field to organize his workers and harvest the land as he does the other six years. However, Yahweh will allow individuals to go through the fields to pick and eat the fruit they find. +LEV 25 7 v4ie כָל־ תְּבוּאָתָ֖⁠הּ 1 all its yield Alternate translation: “whatever grows on the land” +LEV 25 8 g6u6 שֶׁ֚בַע שַׁבְּתֹ֣ת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֔ים 1 seven sabbaths of years Alternate translation: “seven sets of seven years” LEV 25 9 cf78 translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִעִ֔י בֶּ⁠עָשׂ֖וֹר לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 on the seventh month, on the tenth day of the month This is the **seventh month** of the Hebrew calendar. The **tenth day** is near the end of September on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) LEV 25 9 igkl translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שְּׁבִעִ֔י בֶּ⁠עָשׂ֖וֹר לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 on the seventh month, on the tenth day of the month The words **seventh** and **tenth** are the ordinals of “seven” and “ten”. Alternate translation: “in month seven, on day ten of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LEV 25 9 l873 1 the Day of Atonement On this day each year the high priest would make a sacrifice to Yahweh so that Yahweh would forgive all the sins of the people of Israel. See how you translated this in [Leviticus 23:27](../23/27.md). -LEV 25 10 p451 translate-numbers 1 fiftieth year This is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “year 50” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -LEV 25 10 gq84 1 a Jubilee for you The Jubilee was a year when the Jews had to return land to its’ original owners and set slaves free. Alternate translation: “a year of restoration for you” or “a year for you to return land and free slaves” -LEV 25 10 ua35 figs-activepassive 1 property and slaves must be returned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must return property and slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 11 a5fs figs-explicit 1 a Jubilee for you You can state clearly who they were returning the land to. Alternate translation: “a year for you to return the land to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 25 12 ccr2 1 You must eat the produce that grows by itself out of the fields Yahweh did not allow the land owner to organize his workers and harvest the land as he did the other six years. However, he did allow individuals to go through the fields and eat what they find. -LEV 25 13 gq74 1 this year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “this year of restoration” or “this year to return land and free slaves” -LEV 25 15 em1q figs-activepassive 1 that can be harvested If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you can harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 15 kv8f 1 the next Jubilee Alternate translation: “the next year of restoration” or “the next year to return land” -LEV 25 18 r63d figs-parallelism 1 obey my decrees, keep my laws, and carry them out All of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the people must obey everything Yahweh says. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LEV 25 19 cf3a figs-idiom 1 you will eat your fill This means that they would eat enough until their stomach was full. Alternate translation: “you will eat till you are full” or “you will eat plenty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 25 20 m3ed figs-you 1 You might say Here “You” refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -LEV 25 21 qk7b figs-personification 1 I will command my blessing to come upon you God speaks of his blessing as if it were a person that could obey him. Alternate translation: “I will send my blessing on you” or “I will bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LEV 25 22 sm7w figs-activepassive 1 from the provisions stored If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from the food you store” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 23 pm7a 0 General Information: Yahweh continues speaking. -LEV 25 23 gm2n figs-activepassive 1 The land must not be sold to a new permanent owner If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must not sell your land permanently to another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 9 l873 בְּ⁠יוֹם֙ הַ⁠כִּפֻּרִ֔ים 1 On the Day of Atonement On ** the Day of Atonement** each year the high priest would make a sacrifice to Yahweh so that Yahweh would forgive all the sins of the people of Israel. See how you translated this in [Leviticus 23:27](../23/27.md). +LEV 25 10 gq84 יוֹבֵ֥ל הִוא֙ תִּהְיֶ֣ה לָ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 It will be a jubilee for you The Jubilee was a year when the Jews had to return land to its’ original owners and set slaves free. Alternate translation: “it will be a year of restoration for you” or “it will be a year for you to return land and free slaves” +LEV 25 11 a5fs figs-explicit יוֹבֵ֣ל…תִּהְיֶ֣ה לָ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 will be a jubilee for you You can state clearly who they were returning the land to. Alternate translation: “will be a year for you to return the land to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 25 12 ccr2 מִן־ הַ֨⁠שָּׂדֶ֔ה תֹּאכְל֖וּ אֶת־ תְּבוּאָתָֽ⁠הּ 1 You must eat its yield from the field Yahweh did not allow the land owner to organize his workers and harvest the land as he did the other six years. However, he did allow individuals to go through the fields and eat what they find. +LEV 25 13 gq74 בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֥ת הַ⁠יּוֹבֵ֖ל הַ⁠זֹּ֑את 1 In this Year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “In this year of restoration” or “In this year to return land and free slaves” +LEV 25 18 r63d figs-parallelism וַ⁠עֲשִׂיתֶם֙ אֶת־ חֻקֹּתַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־ מִשְׁפָּטַ֥⁠י תִּשְׁמְר֖וּ וַ⁠עֲשִׂיתֶ֣ם אֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 And you must do my statutes, and my laws you must keep and do them All of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the people must obey everything Yahweh says. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +LEV 25 19 cf3a figs-idiom וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֖ם לָ⁠שֹׂ֑בַע 1 and you will eat to satisfaction This means that they would eat enough until their stomach was full. Alternate translation: “and you will eat till you are full” or “snd you will eat plenty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 25 20 m3ed figs-you תֹאמְר֔וּ 1 you say Here, **you** refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +LEV 25 21 qk7b figs-personification וְ⁠צִוִּ֤יתִי אֶת־ בִּרְכָתִ⁠י֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 Then I will command my blessing for you God speaks of Yahweh’s **blessing** as if it were a person that could obey him. Alternate translation: “Then I will send my blessing on you” or “Then I will bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LEV 25 23 gm2n figs-activepassive וְ⁠הָ⁠אָ֗רֶץ לֹ֤א תִמָּכֵר֙ 1 And the land must not be sold If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must not sell your land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 25 24 af5k figs-abstractnouns גְּאֻלָּ֖ה תִּתְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 You must observe the right of redemption If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **redemption**, you could express the same idea with the verbs “redeem” or “buy back.” Alternate translation: “you must remember that the original owner has the right to redeem the land whenever he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LEV 25 24 mg9y figs-activepassive 1 you must allow the land to be bought back by the family from whom you bought it If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must allow the family from whom you bought the land to buy it back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 27 c8fs figs-activepassive 1 the land was sold If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he sold the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 27 lw57 figs-explicit 1 repay the balance to the man to whom he sold it This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “repay to the purchaser who bought it the money the purchaser would have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 25 27 c8fs אֶת־ שְׁנֵ֣י מִמְכָּר֔⁠וֹ 1 the years of its sale Alternate translation: “the number of years since he sold the land” +LEV 25 27 lw57 figs-explicit וְ⁠הֵשִׁיב֙ אֶת־ הָ֣⁠עֹדֵ֔ף לָ⁠אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֣ר מָֽכַר־ ל֑⁠וֹ 1 and return the balance to the man whom he sold it to This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and repay to the purchaser who bought it the money the purchaser would have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LEV 25 28 gbe7 1 the year of Jubilee See how you translated it in [Leviticus 25:10](../25/10.md). Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land” LEV 25 28 f4jg figs-activepassive 1 the land will be returned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one who had bought it will return the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 25 28 me5x 1 will return to his property Alternate translation: “will go back to his land” From aa2c81146d25d6dcc3e065af5c1e33946df4c7f7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 18:00:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 131/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 22 +++++++--------------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 15 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index bf273dcb0c..f5daee47ed 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1027,22 +1027,14 @@ LEV 25 23 gm2n figs-activepassive וְ⁠הָ⁠אָ֗רֶץ לֹ֤א תִמָּ LEV 25 24 af5k figs-abstractnouns גְּאֻלָּ֖ה תִּתְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 You must observe the right of redemption If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **redemption**, you could express the same idea with the verbs “redeem” or “buy back.” Alternate translation: “you must remember that the original owner has the right to redeem the land whenever he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LEV 25 27 c8fs אֶת־ שְׁנֵ֣י מִמְכָּר֔⁠וֹ 1 the years of its sale Alternate translation: “the number of years since he sold the land” LEV 25 27 lw57 figs-explicit וְ⁠הֵשִׁיב֙ אֶת־ הָ֣⁠עֹדֵ֔ף לָ⁠אִ֖ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֣ר מָֽכַר־ ל֑⁠וֹ 1 and return the balance to the man whom he sold it to This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and repay to the purchaser who bought it the money the purchaser would have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 25 28 gbe7 1 the year of Jubilee See how you translated it in [Leviticus 25:10](../25/10.md). Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land” -LEV 25 28 f4jg figs-activepassive 1 the land will be returned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one who had bought it will return the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 28 me5x 1 will return to his property Alternate translation: “will go back to his land” -LEV 25 29 ll7h figs-activepassive 1 after it was sold If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after he sold it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 28 gbe7 שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠יּוֹבֵ֑ל 1 the year of Jubilee See how you translated this in [Leviticus 25:10](../25/10.md). Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land” +LEV 25 28 me5x וְ⁠שָׁ֖ב לַ⁠אֲחֻזָּתֽ⁠וֹ 1 and he will return to his property Alternate translation: “and he will go back to his land” LEV 25 29 ibe6 figs-abstractnouns גְּאֻלָּת֔⁠וֹ 1 the right of redemption If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **redemption**, you could express the same idea with the verbs “redeem” or “buy back.” Alternate translation: “the right to redeem it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LEV 25 30 h32c figs-activepassive 1 If the house is not redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If he or his family does not redeem the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 30 c7lq figs-activepassive 1 It is not to be returned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The man who bought that house will not have to return it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 30 z5l8 1 the year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land and free slaves” -LEV 25 31 hgm4 1 But the houses of the villages that have no wall Some villages did not have a wall around them. -LEV 25 31 y1dt figs-activepassive 1 They may be redeemed, and they must be returned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You may buy back those houses, and those who bought them must return them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 31 f1yq 1 the year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land and free slaves” -LEV 25 32 k9jx figs-activepassive 1 the houses owned by the Levites in their cities If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the houses that the Levites own in their cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 32 sk2r figs-activepassive 1 may be redeemed at any time If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Levites may redeem them at any time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 33 yf5t figs-activepassive 1 the house that was sold in the city where it is located must be returned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one who bought the house in the city where it is located must return it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 33 kaj1 1 the year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land and free slaves” -LEV 25 33 js2l 1 their property among the people of Israel The land of Canaan was divided up among the people of Israel, but of that land, the Levites were only given 48 cities with the fields around them. Alternate translation: “their part of the land that the Israelites possessed” or “their property in the land of Israel” +LEV 25 30 h32c figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִ֣ם לֹֽא־ יִגָּאֵ֗ל 1 And if it is not redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And if he or his family does not redeem the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 31 hgm4 וּ⁠בָתֵּ֣י הַ⁠חֲצֵרִ֗ים אֲשֶׁ֨ר אֵין־ לָ⁠הֶ֤ם חֹמָה֙ סָבִ֔יב 1 And the houses of the villages that have no wall around them Some **villages** did not have a **wall** around them. +LEV 25 33 yf5t מִמְכַּר־ בַּ֛יִת 1 a sold house Alternate translation: “a house that he has sold” +LEV 25 33 kaj1 בַּ⁠יֹּבֵ֑ל 1 in the Jubilee Alternate translation: “in the year of restoration” or “in the year to return land and free slaves” +LEV 25 33 js2l הִ֚וא אֲחֻזָּתָ֔⁠ם בְּ⁠ת֖וֹךְ בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 it is their possession among the sons of Israel The land of Canaan was divided up among the people of Israel, but of that land, the Levites were only given 48 cities with the fields around them. Alternate translation: “it is their part of the land that the Israelites possessed” or “it is their property in the land of Israel” LEV 25 34 ehh8 figs-activepassive 1 But the fields around their cities may not be sold If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But the Levites must not sell the fields around their cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 25 36 pkf5 1 Do not charge him interest Alternate translation: “Do not make him pay you back more than what you lend him” LEV 25 39 mgw3 1 you must not make him work like a slave The owner was to treat the Israelite with more respect than he would treat a slave. From 73d1e75007403c1519add686f4917484cca35a50 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 18:50:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 132/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 35 +++++++++++++++-------------------- 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+), 20 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index f5daee47ed..800fd1e851 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1035,28 +1035,23 @@ LEV 25 31 hgm4 וּ⁠בָתֵּ֣י הַ⁠חֲצֵרִ֗ים אֲשֶׁ֨ר LEV 25 33 yf5t מִמְכַּר־ בַּ֛יִת 1 a sold house Alternate translation: “a house that he has sold” LEV 25 33 kaj1 בַּ⁠יֹּבֵ֑ל 1 in the Jubilee Alternate translation: “in the year of restoration” or “in the year to return land and free slaves” LEV 25 33 js2l הִ֚וא אֲחֻזָּתָ֔⁠ם בְּ⁠ת֖וֹךְ בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 it is their possession among the sons of Israel The land of Canaan was divided up among the people of Israel, but of that land, the Levites were only given 48 cities with the fields around them. Alternate translation: “it is their part of the land that the Israelites possessed” or “it is their property in the land of Israel” -LEV 25 34 ehh8 figs-activepassive 1 But the fields around their cities may not be sold If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But the Levites must not sell the fields around their cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 36 pkf5 1 Do not charge him interest Alternate translation: “Do not make him pay you back more than what you lend him” -LEV 25 39 mgw3 1 you must not make him work like a slave The owner was to treat the Israelite with more respect than he would treat a slave. -LEV 25 40 si62 1 Treat him as a hired servant The owner was to treat the Israelite with more respect than he would treat a slave. -LEV 25 40 u2tl 1 the year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land and free slaves” -LEV 25 42 ucx8 1 they are my servants Alternate translation: “your fellow countrymen are my servants” -LEV 25 42 i1ab figs-activepassive 1 They will not be sold as slaves If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must not sell them as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 44 wz9f 1 you may buy slaves from them Alternate translation: “you may buy slaves from those nations” -LEV 25 48 u2as figs-activepassive 1 after your fellow Israelite has been bought, he may be bought back. Someone in his family may redeem him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the foreigner buys your fellow Israelite, someone in the Israelite’s family may buy him back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 50 c6m4 1 until the year of Jubilee An Israelite could be a slave only until the year of Jubilee. These instructions are for when an Israelite wanted to buy back his freedom before the year of Jubilee. -LEV 25 50 fa22 1 the year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land and to free slaves” -LEV 25 50 atu9 figs-activepassive 1 The price of his redemption must be figured If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “They must figure the price of his redemption” or “They must figure how much to pay for the foreigner to set the Israelite free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 50 cqg2 figs-activepassive 1 in keeping with the rate paid to a hired servant If the Israelite bought back his freedom, the foreigner would have to hire a servant to do the work that the Israelite would have done but will not. If your language does not use the passive verbs **paid** and **hired** in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the rate a person would pay to hire a servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 50 twu2 1 for the number of years he might continue to work Alternate translation: “for the number of years until the jubilee that the Israelite would have continued to work but will not” -LEV 25 51 iq2q 1 he must pay back Alternate translation: “the Israelite slave must pay back” -LEV 25 53 g8n2 figs-activepassive 1 He is to be treated If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The foreigner who bought him as a slave must treat him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 25 53 v7sk figs-activepassive 1 he is not treated with harshness If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one treats him badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 34 ehh8 figs-activepassive וּֽ⁠שְׂדֵ֛ה מִגְרַ֥שׁ עָרֵי⁠הֶ֖ם לֹ֣א יִמָּכֵ֑ר 1 And the field of the pastureland of their cities must not be sold If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And the Levites must not sell the fields around their cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 36 pkf5 אַל־ תִּקַּ֤ח מֵֽ⁠אִתּ⁠וֹ֙ נֶ֣שֶׁךְ וְ⁠תַרְבִּ֔ית 1 Do not take from him interest or usury Alternate translation: “Do not make him pay you back more than what you lend him” +LEV 25 39 mgw3 לֹא־ תַעֲבֹ֥ד בּ֖⁠וֹ עֲבֹ֥דַת עָֽבֶד 1 you must not make him work the work of a slave The owner was to treat the Israelite with more respect than he would treat **a slave**. +LEV 25 40 si62 כְּ⁠שָׂכִ֥יר כְּ⁠תוֹשָׁ֖ב יִהְיֶ֣ה עִמָּ֑⁠ךְ 1 Like a hired worker, like a temporary resident, he must be with you The owner was to treat the Israelite with more respect than he would treat a slave. +LEV 25 40 u2tl שְׁנַ֥ת הַ⁠יֹּבֵ֖ל 1 the year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land and free slaves” +LEV 25 42 ucx8 עֲבָדַ֣⁠י הֵ֔ם 1 they are my servants Alternate translation: “your fellow countrymen are my servants” +LEV 25 42 i1ab figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִמָּכְר֖וּ מִמְכֶּ֥רֶת עָֽבֶד 1 They will not be sold in a slave sale If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must not sell them as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 48 u2as figs-activepassive אַחֲרֵ֣י נִמְכַּ֔ר גְּאֻלָּ֖ה תִּהְיֶה־ לּ֑⁠וֹ אֶחָ֥ד מֵ⁠אֶחָ֖י⁠ו יִגְאָלֶֽ⁠נּוּ 1 after he has been sold, there will be redemption for him. One of his brothers may redeem him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the foreigner buys your fellow Israelite, someone in the Israelite’s family may buy him back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 50 c6m4 עַ֖ד שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠יֹּבֵ֑ל 1 until the year of Jubilee An Israelite could be a slave only **until the year of Jubilee**. These instructions are for when an Israelite wanted to buy back his freedom before the year of Jubilee. +LEV 25 50 fa22 שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠יֹּבֵ֑ל 1 the year of Jubilee Alternate translation: “the year of restoration” or “the year to return land and to free slaves” +LEV 25 50 twu2 בְּ⁠מִסְפַּ֣ר שָׁנִ֔ים 1 according to the number of years Alternate translation: “according to the number of years until the jubilee that the Israelite would have continued to work but will not” +LEV 25 50 cqg2 figs-activepassive כִּ⁠ימֵ֥י שָׂכִ֖יר יִהְיֶ֥ה עִמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 like the days of a hired worker it will be with him If the Israelite bought back his freedom, the foreigner would have to hire a servant to do the work that the Israelite would have done but will not. If your language does not use the passive verb **hired** in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the rate a person would pay to hire a servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 25 51 iq2q יָשִׁ֣יב 1 he must pay back Alternate translation: “the Israelite slave must pay back” LEV 25 54 yn4a figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִם־ לֹ֥א יִגָּאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠אֵ֑לֶּה 1 And if he is not redeemed by these If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If no one redeems him by these means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 25 54 lr8h figs-explicit וְ⁠אִם־ לֹ֥א יִגָּאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠אֵ֑לֶּה 1 And if he is not redeemed by these You can state explicitly who he is to be redeemed from. Alternate translation: “If no one redeems him by these means from the one who bought him as a slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 25 54 u2vz 1 by these means Alternate translation: “in this way” -LEV 25 54 e1ni 1 he must serve until the year of Jubilee, he and his children with him The Israelite slave and his children would serve the foreigner until the year of Jubilee, and then the foreigner would have to set the Israelite and his children free. -LEV 25 55 g12z 1 To me the people of Israel are servants This is the reason that God wanted the Israelites to be set free in the year of jubilee. They were his servants. They were not permitted to be anyone else’s permanent slave. Alternate translation: “For it is to me that the people of Israel are servants” +LEV 25 54 e1ni וְ⁠יָצָא֙ בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠יֹּבֵ֔ל ה֖וּא וּ⁠בָנָ֥י⁠ו עִמּֽ⁠וֹ 1 then he must go out in the Year of Jubilee, he and his sons with him The Israelite slave and his children would serve the foreigner until the **Year of Jubilee**, and then the foreigner would have to set the Israelite and his children free. +LEV 25 55 g12z לִ֤⁠י בְנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ עֲבָדִ֔ים 1 to me the sons of Israel are servants This is the reason that God wanted the Israelites to be set free in the year of jubilee. They were his **servants**. They were not permitted to be anyone else’s permanent slave. Alternate translation: “it is to me that the people of Israel are servants” LEV 26 intro tb8x 0 # Leviticus 26 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Worship only Yahweh

If people obey God and worship only him, he will bless and protect them. If people disobey his law and if they worship other gods, then he will severely punish them to help them to repent and begin obeying him. This takes the form of a promise. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]]) LEV 26 1 cd19 0 General Information: Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do. LEV 26 2 rh4n 1 keep my Sabbaths Alternate translation: “obey the rules for my Sabbaths” From dd2f37690caea76844ba569aeccd0c43498fea67 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 19:10:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 133/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 5047bbe586..724b1fc626 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 4cfb51b8d426d40667c971a9e454a9217fedf6c5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 19:13:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 134/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 724b1fc626..6a459dc1da 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n\n### Eating meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 5b6759a285cffccc13e6bd2d331de874332f5b8d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 19:14:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 135/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 6a459dc1da..d9c39bcc04 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From cd7edab1a7e982e7ed4cbcce95c6b334a8df117a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 19:28:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 137/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index d9c39bcc04..a5aa5e7398 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n\n\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n\n\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n\n\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n\n\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\n\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis? 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 338363764826ff7cd87f56f529d4025e3dac24d8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 19:32:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 138/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 47 +++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 26 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 800fd1e851..e4f53be5a0 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1054,34 +1054,29 @@ LEV 25 54 e1ni וְ⁠יָצָא֙ בִּ⁠שְׁנַ֣ת הַ⁠יֹּבֵ֔ LEV 25 55 g12z לִ֤⁠י בְנֵֽי־ יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ עֲבָדִ֔ים 1 to me the sons of Israel are servants This is the reason that God wanted the Israelites to be set free in the year of jubilee. They were his **servants**. They were not permitted to be anyone else’s permanent slave. Alternate translation: “it is to me that the people of Israel are servants” LEV 26 intro tb8x 0 # Leviticus 26 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Worship only Yahweh

If people obey God and worship only him, he will bless and protect them. If people disobey his law and if they worship other gods, then he will severely punish them to help them to repent and begin obeying him. This takes the form of a promise. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]]) LEV 26 1 cd19 0 General Information: Yahweh continues telling Moses what the people must do. -LEV 26 2 rh4n 1 keep my Sabbaths Alternate translation: “obey the rules for my Sabbaths” -LEV 26 3 wkx2 figs-parallelism 1 walk in my laws and keep my commandments and obey them These are three ways of saying the same thing. They emphasize that the people must obey everything that God commands them to do. Alternate translation: “If you carefully obey my laws and commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LEV 26 3 kv48 figs-metaphor 1 walk in my laws Behaving according to the laws is spoken of as if they were to walk in the laws. Alternate translation: “If you behave according to my laws” or “if you live according to my laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 2 rh4n אֶת־ שַׁבְּתֹתַ֣⁠י תִּשְׁמֹ֔רוּ 1 My sabbaths you must keep Alternate translation: “You must obey the rules for my Sabbaths” +LEV 26 3 wkx2 figs-parallelism בְּ⁠חֻקֹּתַ֖⁠י תֵּלֵ֑כוּ וְ⁠אֶת־ מִצְוֺתַ֣⁠י תִּשְׁמְר֔וּ וַ⁠עֲשִׂיתֶ֖ם אֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 you walk in my statutes and keep my commandments and do them These are three ways of saying the same thing. They emphasize that the people must obey everything that God commands them to do. Alternate translation: “If you carefully obey my laws and commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +LEV 26 3 kv48 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠חֻקֹּתַ֖⁠י תֵּלֵ֑כוּ 1 you walk in my statutes Behaving according to the **statutes** is spoken of as if they were to **walk** in the laws. Alternate translation: “you behave according to my laws” or “you live according to my laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 26 5 t78x figs-synecdoche וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם לַחְמְ⁠כֶם֙ לָ⁠שֹׂ֔בַע 1 And you will eat your bread to satisfaction Here **bread** represents food. Alternate translation: “will eat your food to satisfaction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LEV 26 5 unad figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם לַחְמְ⁠כֶם֙ לָ⁠שֹׂ֔בַע 1 And you will eat your bread to satisfaction If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **satisfaction**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “And you will eat food until you are satisfied” or “And you will have plenty of food to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LEV 26 6 m5jk 1 I will give peace in the land Alternate translation: “I will cause there to be peace in the land” -LEV 26 6 s3gb figs-metonymy 1 the sword will not pass through your land Here the word “sword” represents enemy armies or enemy attacks. Alternate translation: “no armies will attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 7 xxd1 figs-metonymy 1 they will fall before you by the sword Here “falling” represents dying, and “the sword” represents either attacking people with a sword or battle in general. Alternate translation: “they will die when you attack them with the sword” or “you will kill them in battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 8 nd6t 1 Five of you will chase away a hundred, and a hundred of you will chase ten thousand This means the Israelites will have victory against larger armies. -LEV 26 8 hvk7 translate-numbers 1 Five … hundred … ten thousand Alternate translation: “5…100…10,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -LEV 26 9 p7zz 1 I will look at you with favor Alternate translation: “I will show you favor” or “I will bless you” -LEV 26 9 fq7x figs-doublet 1 make you fruitful and multiply you These two phrases refer to God causing them to have many descendants so they become a large group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -LEV 26 9 l7q1 figs-metaphor 1 make you fruitful God speaks of them having many children as if they were trees that bear a lot of fruit. Alternate translation: “cause you to have many children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 10 u1ax 1 You will eat food stored a long time Alternate translation: “You will have enough food stored to eat for a long time” or “you will have enough food to store and eat it for a long time” -LEV 26 11 n29m 1 I will place my tabernacle among you Alternate translation: “I will put my dwelling place among you” -LEV 26 11 cl4q 1 I will not detest you Alternate translation: “I will accept you” -LEV 26 12 xh2c figs-metaphor 1 I will walk among you Walking among them represents living with them. Alternate translation: “I will live with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 13 wh35 figs-metaphor 1 I have broken the bars of your yoke God speaks of their slavery as if they had to wear a yoke that animals wear in order to do hard work. Breaking the bars of the yoke represents setting them free. Alternate translation: “I have set you free from the hard labor they made you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 14 g8tn 0 General Information: Yahweh is telling Moses what will happen if the people do not obey his commands. -LEV 26 16 kw48 1 if you do these things The phrase “these things” refers to the things listed in [Leviticus 26:14-15](./14.md). -LEV 26 16 u8mf figs-metaphor 1 I will inflict terror on you Here “terror” represents the things that will cause them to be terrified. Alternate translation: “I will send disasters that will terrify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 16 k4xi 1 will drain away your life It is the diseases and the fever that will do this. Alternate translation: “will slowly take away your life” or “will slowly make you die” -LEV 26 16 a48w figs-idiom 1 You will plant your seeds for nothing The phrase “for nothing” means that they would get nothing from their work. Alternate translation: “You will plant your seeds in vain” or “You will plant your seeds, but you will not get anything from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 26 17 ae65 figs-idiom 1 I will set my face against you This idiom means he “firmly decided.” Alternate translation: “I have made up my mind to oppose you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 26 17 q4fp figs-activepassive 1 you will be overpowered by your enemies If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “your enemies will defeat you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 26 18 kng3 figs-idiom 1 seven times Here “seven times” is not literal. It means Yahweh will increase the severity of his punishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 26 19 q54p figs-metaphor 1 I will break your pride in your power Using force to cause them not to be proud is spoken of as if he were to break their pride. Alternate translation: “I will punish you and so end the pride that you feel about your power” or “I will punish you so that you will no longer be proud of your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 19 wsq1 figs-simile 1 I will make the sky over you like iron and your land like bronze This means God will stop the rain from falling from the sky. This will make the ground hard so that people cannot plant seed or grow crops. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +LEV 26 6 m5jk וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֤י שָׁלוֹם֙ בָּ⁠אָ֔רֶץ 1 And I will give peace in the land Alternate translation: “And I will cause there to be peace in the land” +LEV 26 6 s3gb figs-metonymy וְ⁠חֶ֖רֶב לֹא־ תַעֲבֹ֥ר בְּ⁠אַרְצְ⁠כֶֽם 1 and the sword will not pass through your land Here the word **sword** represents enemy armies or enemy attacks. Alternate translation: “and no armies will attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 7 xxd1 figs-metonymy וְ⁠נָפְל֥וּ לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם לֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 and they will fall before your face by the sword Here, **fall** represents dying, and **the sword** represents either attacking people with a sword or battle in general. Alternate translation: “and they will die when you attack them with the sword” or “and you will kill them in battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 8 nd6t וְ⁠רָדְפ֨וּ מִ⁠כֶּ֤ם חֲמִשָּׁה֙ מֵאָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵאָ֥ה מִ⁠כֶּ֖ם רְבָבָ֣ה יִרְדֹּ֑פוּ 1 And five from you will pursue a hundred, and a hundred from you will pursue ten thousand This means the Israelites will have victory against larger armies. +LEV 26 9 p7zz וּ⁠פָנִ֣יתִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 And I will turn to you Alternate translation: “And I will show you favor” or “And I will bless you” +LEV 26 9 fq7x figs-doublet וְ⁠הִפְרֵיתִ֣י אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠הִרְבֵּיתִ֖י אֶתְ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 and make you fruitful and multiply you These two phrases refer to God causing them to have many descendants so they become a large group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +LEV 26 9 l7q1 figs-metaphor וְ⁠הִפְרֵיתִ֣י אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 and make you fruitful God speaks of them having many children as if they were trees that bear a lot of fruit. Alternate translation: “and cause you to have many children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 10 u1ax וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֥ם יָשָׁ֖ן נוֹשָׁ֑ן 1 And you will eat the old that has grown old Alternate translation: “And you will have enough food stored to eat for a long time” or “And you will have enough food to store and eat it for a long time” +LEV 26 11 cl4q figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־ תִגְעַ֥ל נַפְשִׁ֖⁠י אֶתְ⁠כֶֽם 1 and my spirit will not detest you If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not detest**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “and I will accept you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +LEV 26 12 xh2c figs-metaphor וְ⁠הִתְהַלַּכְתִּי֙ בְּ⁠ת֣וֹכְ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 And I will walk in the midst of you Walking among them represents living with them. Alternate translation: “And I will live with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 13 wh35 figs-metaphor וָ⁠אֶשְׁבֹּר֙ מֹטֹ֣ת עֻלְּ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 And I broke the bars of your yoke God speaks of their slavery as if they had to wear a **yoke** that animals wear in order to do hard work. Breaking **the bars** of the yoke represents setting them free. Alternate translation: “I have set you free from the hard labor they made you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 16 u8mf figs-metaphor וְ⁠הִפְקַדְתִּ֨י עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֤ם בֶּֽהָלָה֙ 1 I will inflict terror on you Here, **terror** represents the things that will cause them to be terrified. Alternate translation: “I will send disasters that will terrify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 16 k4xi וּ⁠מְדִיבֹ֣ת נָ֑פֶשׁ 1 and drains away life It is the diseases and the fever that will do this. Alternate translation: “and will slowly take away your life” or “and will slowly make you die” +LEV 26 16 a48w figs-idiom וּ⁠זְרַעְתֶּ֤ם לָ⁠רִיק֙ זַרְעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 And you will sow your seed for nothing The phrase **for nothing** means that they would get nothing from their work. Alternate translation: “And you will plant your seeds in vain” or “And you will plant your seeds, but you will not get anything from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 26 17 ae65 figs-idiom וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֤י פָנַ⁠י֙ בָּ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 And I will set my face against you This idiom means he “firmly decided.” Alternate translation: “And I have made up my mind to oppose you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 26 18 kng3 figs-idiom שֶׁ֖בַע 1 seven times Here, **seven times** is not literal. It means Yahweh will increase the severity of his punishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 26 19 q54p figs-metaphor וְ⁠שָׁבַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־ גְּא֣וֹן עֻזְּ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 And I will break the pride of your power Using force to cause them not to be proud is spoken of as if he were to **break** their **pride**. Alternate translation: “And I will punish you and so end the pride that you feel about your power” or “And I will punish you so that you will no longer be proud of your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 19 wsq1 figs-simile וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֤י אֶת־ שְׁמֵי⁠כֶם֙ כַּ⁠בַּרְזֶ֔ל וְ⁠אֶֽת־ אַרְצְ⁠כֶ֖ם כַּ⁠נְּחֻשָֽׁה 1 And I will make your sky like iron and your land like bronze This means God will stop the rain from falling from **the sky**. This will make the ground hard so that people cannot plant seed or grow crops. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LEV 26 20 j47f figs-metaphor וְ⁠תַ֥ם לָ⁠רִ֖יק כֹּחֲ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 And your strength will be used up for nothing Working very hard is spoken of as if they were to use all their **strength** until they had no more strength. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 26 20 c0hd figs-idiom וְ⁠תַ֥ם לָ⁠רִ֖יק כֹּחֲ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 And your strength will be used up for nothing The phrase **for nothing** means that they would get nothing from working so hard. Alternate translation: “You will work very hard in vain” or “You will work very hard, but you will not receive anything good from working so hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LEV 26 21 fy3n figs-metaphor 1 walk against me Walking represents behavior. Walking against God represents opposing him or rebelling against him. Alternate translation: “rebel against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From cffb7a6597244a33d4550721fe45ef2871fb3791 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 19:53:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 139/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 26 ++++++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index e4f53be5a0..58a27a56c8 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1079,22 +1079,20 @@ LEV 26 19 q54p figs-metaphor וְ⁠שָׁבַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־ גְּא֣ LEV 26 19 wsq1 figs-simile וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֤י אֶת־ שְׁמֵי⁠כֶם֙ כַּ⁠בַּרְזֶ֔ל וְ⁠אֶֽת־ אַרְצְ⁠כֶ֖ם כַּ⁠נְּחֻשָֽׁה 1 And I will make your sky like iron and your land like bronze This means God will stop the rain from falling from **the sky**. This will make the ground hard so that people cannot plant seed or grow crops. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LEV 26 20 j47f figs-metaphor וְ⁠תַ֥ם לָ⁠רִ֖יק כֹּחֲ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 And your strength will be used up for nothing Working very hard is spoken of as if they were to use all their **strength** until they had no more strength. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 26 20 c0hd figs-idiom וְ⁠תַ֥ם לָ⁠רִ֖יק כֹּחֲ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 And your strength will be used up for nothing The phrase **for nothing** means that they would get nothing from working so hard. Alternate translation: “You will work very hard in vain” or “You will work very hard, but you will not receive anything good from working so hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 26 21 fy3n figs-metaphor 1 walk against me Walking represents behavior. Walking against God represents opposing him or rebelling against him. Alternate translation: “rebel against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 21 mar9 figs-metaphor 1 I will bring seven times more blows on you Yahweh causing disasters to happen to the Israelites is spoken of as if he would strike them with blows or hit them. Alternate translation: “I will cause seven times as many disasters to come against you” or “I will punish you seven times more severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 21 tp4i figs-idiom 1 seven times Here “seven times” is not literal. It means Yahweh will increase the severity of his punishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 26 21 fy3n figs-metaphor תֵּֽלְכ֤וּ עִמִּ⁠י֙ 1 you walk against me Walking represents behavior. To **walk against** God represents opposing him or rebelling against him. Alternate translation: “you rebel against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 21 mar9 figs-metaphor וְ⁠יָסַפְתִּ֤י עֲלֵי⁠כֶם֙ מַכָּ֔ה שֶׁ֖בַע 1 then I will add upon you a plague seven times Yahweh causing disasters to happen to the Israelites is spoken of as if he would strike them with blows or hit them. Alternate translation: “I will cause seven times as many disasters to come against you” or “I will punish you seven times more severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 21 tp4i figs-idiom שֶׁ֖בַע 1 seven times Here, **seven times** is not literal. It means Yahweh will increase the severity of his punishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LEV 26 21 uyk7 figs-abstractnouns כְּ⁠חַטֹּאתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 in proportion to your sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **sins**, you could express the same idea with the verb “sin.” Alternate translation: “according to how much you have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LEV 26 22 lgr8 figs-metaphor 1 which will steal your children Stealing represents attacking or attacking and dragging them away. Alternate translation: “which will attack your children” or “which will drag your children away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 22 qpn6 1 So your roads will become deserted Deserted means that there is no one there. Alternate translation: “So no one will travel on your roads” -LEV 26 23 u17j 1 If in spite of these things Alternate translation: “If when I punish you like this” or “If I discipline you like this and” -LEV 26 23 a4z5 figs-metaphor 1 you still do not accept my correction Accepting his correction represents responding rightly to it. In this case responding rightly to it is choosing to obey him. Alternate translation: “you still do not listen to my correction” or “you still do not obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 23 l9uu figs-metaphor 1 walk in opposition to me Walking represents behavior. Walking in opposition to him means opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “oppose me” or “fight against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 24 v5bm figs-metaphor 1 I will also walk in opposition to you Walking represents behavior. Walking in opposition to them means opposing them or fighting against them. Alternate translation: “I also will oppose you” or “I also will fight against you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 24 e1h9 1 I myself will punish you seven times The number 7 represents completeness. Alternate translation: “I will personally punish you many times” or “I myself will punish you most severely” +LEV 26 22 qpn6 וְ⁠נָשַׁ֖מּוּ דַּרְכֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 And your roads will become deserted Here, **deserted** means that there is no one there. Alternate translation: “And so no one will travel on your roads” +LEV 26 23 u17j וְ⁠אִ֨ם־ בְּ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה 1 And if in spite of these things Alternate translation: “And if when I punish you like this” or “And if I discipline you like this and” +LEV 26 23 a4z5 figs-metaphor לֹ֥א תִוָּסְר֖וּ לִ֑⁠י 1 you do not accept my discipline Accepting his **discipline** represents responding rightly to it. In this case responding rightly to it is choosing to obey him. Alternate translation: “you still do not listen to my correction” or “you still do not obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 23 l9uu figs-metaphor וַ⁠הֲלַכְתֶּ֥ם עִמִּ֖⁠י קֶֽרִי 1 and you walk against me in opposition To **walk** represents behavior. Walking **in opposition** to him means opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “and you oppose me” or “and you fight against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 24 v5bm figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָלַכְתִּ֧י אַף־ אֲנִ֛י עִמָּ⁠כֶ֖ם בְּ⁠קֶ֑רִי 1 then I will also walk, I myself, against you in opposition To **walk** represents behavior. Walking **in opposition** to him means opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “then I myself will also oppose you” or “ then I myself will also fight against you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 24 e1h9 וְ⁠הִכֵּיתִ֤י אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ גַּם־ אָ֔נִי שֶׁ֖בַע 1 And I will strike you, even I myself, seven times The number **seven** represents completeness. Alternate translation: “And I will personally punish you many times” or “And I myself will punish you most severely” LEV 26 24 rqi5 figs-abstractnouns עַל־ חַטֹּאתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 because of your sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **sins**, you could express the same idea with the verb “sin.” Alternate translation: “because you continue to sin against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LEV 26 25 ca56 figs-metonymy 1 I will bring a sword on you Here the word “sword” represents an army or an attack from an army. Alternate translation: “I will bring an enemy army against you” or “I will cause an enemy army to attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 25 z45g 1 that will execute vengeance Alternate translation: “that will punish you” -LEV 26 25 eix8 1 for breaking the covenant Alternate translation: “for disobeying the covenant” or “because you disobey the covenant” -LEV 26 25 tfd5 figs-activepassive 1 You will be gathered together If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You will gather together” or “You will hide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 26 25 ca56 figs-metonymy וְ⁠הֵבֵאתִ֨י עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֜ם חֶ֗רֶב 1 And I will bring a sword upon you Here the word **sword** represents an army or an attack from an army. Alternate translation: “And I will bring an enemy army against you” or “And I will cause an enemy army to attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 25 z45g נֹקֶ֨מֶת֙ נְקַם־ בְּרִ֔ית 1 that will avenge with the vengeance of the covenant Alternate translation: “that will punish you because you broke the covenant” +LEV 26 25 tfd5 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נֶאֱסַפְתֶּ֖ם 1 and you will be gathered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you will gather together” or “and you will run to hide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 26 25 y2qp figs-metonymy וְ⁠נִתַּתֶּ֖ם בְּ⁠יַד־ אוֹיֵֽב 1 and you will be given into the hand of the one who is hostile Here “into the hand” means “into the control” and refers to defeat by their enemy. Alternate translation: “and you will be place under the control of your enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 26 25 pytz figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִתַּתֶּ֖ם בְּ⁠יַד־ אוֹיֵֽב 1 and you will be given into the hand of the one who is hostile If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will deliver you into the hand of your enemy” or “I will allow your enemy to control you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 26 26 c11s figs-metaphor 1 When I cut off your food supply Destroying the food that people have stored or stopping people from being able to get it is spoken of as cutting off the supply of food. Alternate translation: “When I destroy the food you have stored” or “When I stop you from being able to get food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 4b16219cc6ef6c65abac32ad788c10edd2e2cba0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 20:01:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 140/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 14 +++++++------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 58a27a56c8..da1800e550 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1095,13 +1095,13 @@ LEV 26 25 z45g נֹקֶ֨מֶת֙ נְקַם־ בְּרִ֔ית 1 that will ave LEV 26 25 tfd5 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נֶאֱסַפְתֶּ֖ם 1 and you will be gathered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you will gather together” or “and you will run to hide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 26 25 y2qp figs-metonymy וְ⁠נִתַּתֶּ֖ם בְּ⁠יַד־ אוֹיֵֽב 1 and you will be given into the hand of the one who is hostile Here “into the hand” means “into the control” and refers to defeat by their enemy. Alternate translation: “and you will be place under the control of your enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 26 25 pytz figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִתַּתֶּ֖ם בְּ⁠יַד־ אוֹיֵֽב 1 and you will be given into the hand of the one who is hostile If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will deliver you into the hand of your enemy” or “I will allow your enemy to control you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 26 26 c11s figs-metaphor 1 When I cut off your food supply Destroying the food that people have stored or stopping people from being able to get it is spoken of as cutting off the supply of food. Alternate translation: “When I destroy the food you have stored” or “When I stop you from being able to get food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 26 nw44 1 ten women will be able to bake your bread in one oven This implies that there will be so little flour that one small oven will be able to hold all the bread that many women can put into it. -LEV 26 26 jm66 1 they will distribute your bread by weight This means there will be so little food that they will have to measure how much each person gets. -LEV 26 27 l2dr figs-metonymy 1 If you do not listen to me Listening represents obeying what he has said. Alternate translation: “If you do not obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 27 gbl4 figs-metaphor 1 to walk against me Walking represents behavior. Walking against someone represents opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “to oppose me” or “to fight against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 28 y7le figs-metaphor 1 I will walk against you Walking represents behavior. Walking against someone represents opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “I will oppose you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 28 l1fi figs-idiom 1 I will punish you even seven more times as much Here “seven more times” is not literal. It means Yahweh will increase the severity of his punishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LEV 26 26 c11s figs-metaphor בְּ⁠שִׁבְרִ֣⁠י לָ⁠כֶם֮ מַטֵּה־ לֶחֶם֒ 1 When I break the staff of your bread Destroying the food that people have stored or stopping people from being able to get it is spoken of as **breaking the staff of** their **bread**. Alternate translation: “When I destroy the food you have stored” or “When I cut off your food supply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 26 nw44 וְ֠⁠אָפוּ עֶ֣שֶׂר נָשִׁ֤ים לַחְמְ⁠כֶם֙ בְּ⁠תַנּ֣וּר אֶחָ֔ד 1 then ten women will bake your bread in one oven This implies that there will be so little flour that **one** small **oven** will be able to hold all the **bread** that many **women** have to put into it. +LEV 26 26 jm66 וְ⁠הֵשִׁ֥יבוּ לַחְמְ⁠כֶ֖ם בַּ⁠מִּשְׁקָ֑ל 1 And they will distribute your bread by weight This means there will be so little bread that they will have to measure how much each person gets. +LEV 26 27 l2dr figs-metonymy לֹ֥א תִשְׁמְע֖וּ לִ֑⁠י 1 you do not listen to me To **listen** represents obeying what he has said. Alternate translation: “you do not obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 27 gbl4 figs-metaphor וַ⁠הֲלַכְתֶּ֥ם עִמִּ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קֶֽרִי 1 and you walk against me in opposition To **walk** represents behavior. Walking **against** someone represents opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “and you oppose me” or “and you fight against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 28 y7le figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָלַכְתִּ֥י עִמָּ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 then I will walk against you To **walk** represents behavior. Walking **against** someone represents opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “then I will oppose you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 28 l1fi figs-idiom וְ⁠יִסַּרְתִּ֤י אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ אַף־ אָ֔נִי שֶׁ֖בַע 1 And I will discipline you, even I, seven times Here, **seven times** is not literal. It means Yahweh will increase the severity of his punishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LEV 26 30 i3eb figs-metonymy 1 I will destroy … cut down … throw your corpses Because God would send an army to do these things, he speaks as if he would do them. Alternate translation: “I will send an enemy army to destroy … cut down … throw your corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 26 30 fnw5 1 your corpses Alternate translation: “your dead bodies” LEV 26 30 hay8 figs-metaphor 1 the corpses of your idols God speaks of idols not being alive as if they had been alive and then died. Alternate translation: “your lifeless idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 674d59760a1518d4dfe5376333d2493eaff034e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 20:47:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 141/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 48 ++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- 1 file changed, 22 insertions(+), 26 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index da1800e550..671f696ab3 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1102,34 +1102,30 @@ LEV 26 27 l2dr figs-metonymy לֹ֥א תִשְׁמְע֖וּ לִ֑⁠י 1 you d LEV 26 27 gbl4 figs-metaphor וַ⁠הֲלַכְתֶּ֥ם עִמִּ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קֶֽרִי 1 and you walk against me in opposition To **walk** represents behavior. Walking **against** someone represents opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “and you oppose me” or “and you fight against me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 26 28 y7le figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָלַכְתִּ֥י עִמָּ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 then I will walk against you To **walk** represents behavior. Walking **against** someone represents opposing him or fighting against him. Alternate translation: “then I will oppose you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 26 28 l1fi figs-idiom וְ⁠יִסַּרְתִּ֤י אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ אַף־ אָ֔נִי שֶׁ֖בַע 1 And I will discipline you, even I, seven times Here, **seven times** is not literal. It means Yahweh will increase the severity of his punishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 26 30 i3eb figs-metonymy 1 I will destroy … cut down … throw your corpses Because God would send an army to do these things, he speaks as if he would do them. Alternate translation: “I will send an enemy army to destroy … cut down … throw your corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 30 fnw5 1 your corpses Alternate translation: “your dead bodies” -LEV 26 30 hay8 figs-metaphor 1 the corpses of your idols God speaks of idols not being alive as if they had been alive and then died. Alternate translation: “your lifeless idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 31 d1nw figs-metonymy 1 I will turn your cities into ruins and destroy your sanctuaries Because God would send armies to do these things, he speaks as if he would do them. Alternate translation: “I will send enemy armies to turn your cities into ruins and destroy your sanctuaries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 31 w7pu 1 your sanctuaries These were places where people worshiped idols instead of God. -LEV 26 31 fx76 figs-metaphor 1 I will not be pleased with the aroma of your offerings Normally the Lord’s pleasure with the aroma represents his pleasure with those who burn the offering. But in this case, people would burn offerings, but God would not be pleased with them. Alternate translation: “You will burn offerings, but I will not be pleased with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 33 zv5m figs-metonymy 1 I will draw out my sword and follow you This represents sending armies to attack them. Alternate translation: “I will send enemy armies to attack you” or “I will send enemy armies to attack you with their swords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 33 hix7 figs-activepassive 1 Your land will be abandoned, and your cities will be ruined If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You will abandon your land, and your enemies will destroy your cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 26 34 uf4v figs-personification 1 Then the land will enjoy its Sabbaths The people were supposed to obey the Sabbath law by not farming the land every seventh year. God speaks about this as if the land were a person that would obey the Sabbath law and rest. Alternate translation: “Then the land will rest according to the Sabbath law” or “Then, as required by the Sabbath law, the land will not be farmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LEV 26 35 h58y figs-personification 1 it will have rest God speaks about the land not being farmed as if it were a person that would rest. Alternate translation: “it will not be farmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LEV 26 36 y4ha figs-metaphor 1 I will send fear into your hearts Sending fear into their hearts represents making them afraid. Alternate translation: “I will make you terribly afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 36 l3gz figs-metonymy 1 as though you were fleeing from the sword The sword represents either someone who is ready to kill using a sword or an attack from an enemy army. Alternate translation: “as though you were fleeing from someone who was chasing you with a sword” or “as though you were fleeing from an enemy army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 37 u6pr 0 General Information: Yahweh continues describing what will happen to the Israelites when they are forced to go to their enemies’ countries. -LEV 26 37 fz4e figs-metonymy 1 as though you were running from the sword The sword represents either someone who is ready to kill using a sword or an attack from an enemy army. Alternate translation: “as though you were running away from someone who was chasing you with a sword” or “as though you were running away from an enemy army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 37 kn1c figs-metonymy 1 to stand before your enemies Standing before the enemies represents not falling when the enemies attack and fighting against them. Alternate translation: “to resist your enemies when they attack you” or “to fight back against your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 38 ae6m figs-personification 1 your enemies’ land will itself devour you Yahweh speaks about the enemies’ land as if it were a wild animal that would eat the Israelites. The word “devour” emphasizes that most of the Israelites will die there. Alternate translation: “you will die in your enemies’ land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LEV 26 39 dj82 1 Those who are left among you Alternate translation: “Those of you who do not die” -LEV 26 39 rvh2 1 waste away in their sins Wasting away in their sins represents wasting away because of their sins. -LEV 26 39 yg26 figs-metonymy 1 their fathers’ sins Here “their fathers” represents their ancestors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 40 dys3 figs-metonymy 1 their fathers’ sin The word “fathers” represents their ancestors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 40 bz79 1 their treason by which they were unfaithful to me Alternate translation: “the way that they were unfaithful to me and tuned against me after I had been so good to them” -LEV 26 41 n8ms figs-metaphor 1 to turn against them This represents opposing them. Alternate translation: “to oppose them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 26 41 u7i8 figs-synecdoche 1 if their uncircumcised hearts become humbled Here the term “uncircumcised hearts” refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “if they will be humble instead of stubbornly disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LEV 26 30 i3eb figs-metonymy וְ⁠הִשְׁמַדְתִּ֞י אֶת־ בָּמֹֽתֵי⁠כֶ֗ם וְ⁠הִכְרַתִּי֙ אֶת־ חַמָּ֣נֵי⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠נָֽתַתִּי֙ אֶת־ פִּגְרֵי⁠כֶ֔ם עַל־ פִּגְרֵ֖י גִּלּוּלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 And I will destroy your high places, and cut down your incense altars, and put your corpses on the corpses of your idols Because God would send an army to do these things, he speaks as if he would do them. Alternate translation: “I will send an enemy army to destroy your high places, and cut down your incense altars, and put your corpses on the corpses of your idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 30 hay8 figs-metaphor פִּגְרֵ֖י גִּלּוּלֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 the corpses of your idols God speaks of **idols** not being alive as if they had been alive and then died. Alternate translation: “your lifeless idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 31 d1nw figs-metonymy וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֤י אֶת־ עָֽרֵי⁠כֶם֙ חָרְבָּ֔ה וַ⁠הֲשִׁמּוֹתִ֖י אֶת־ מִקְדְּשֵׁי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 And I will lay your cities in ruins and make your holy places desolate Because God would send armies to do these things, he speaks as if he would do them. Alternate translation: “I will send enemy armies to turn your cities into ruins and destroy your sanctuaries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 31 w7pu אֶת־ מִקְדְּשֵׁי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 your holy places These **holy places** were places where people worshiped idols instead of God. +LEV 26 31 fx76 figs-metaphor וְ⁠לֹ֣א אָרִ֔יחַ בְּ⁠רֵ֖יחַ נִיחֹֽחֲ⁠כֶֽם 1 And I will not smell your sweet aromas Normally the Lord’s pleasure with the **aroma** represents his pleasure with those who burn the offering. But in this case, people would burn offerings, but God would not be pleased with them. Alternate translation: “You will burn offerings, but I will not be pleased with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 33 zv5m figs-metonymy וַ⁠הֲרִיקֹתִ֥י אַחֲרֵי⁠כֶ֖ם חָ֑רֶב 1 and I will unsheathe a sword behind you To ** unsheathe a sword** represents sending armies to chase them. Alternate translation: “and I will send enemy armies to chase you” or “and I will send enemy armies to attack you with their swords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 34 uf4v figs-personification אָז֩ תִּרְצֶ֨ה הָ⁠אָ֜רֶץ אֶת־ שַׁבְּתֹתֶ֗י⁠הָ 1 Then the land will enjoy its sabbaths The people were supposed to obey the sabbath law by not farming the land every seventh year. God speaks about this as if the land were a person that would obey the sabbath law and rest. Alternate translation: “Then the land will rest according to the sabbath law” or “Then, as required by the sabbath law, the land will not be farmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LEV 26 35 h58y figs-personification תִּשְׁבֹּ֑ת 1 it will rest God speaks about the land not being farmed as if it were a person that would **rest**. Alternate translation: “it will not be farmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LEV 26 36 y4ha figs-metaphor וְ⁠הֵבֵ֤אתִי מֹ֨רֶךְ֙ בִּ⁠לְבָבָ֔⁠ם 1 I will bring despair into their hearts To **bring despair** into their hearts represents making them afraid. Alternate translation: “I will make you terribly afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 36 l3gz figs-metonymy מְנֻֽסַת־ חֶ֛רֶב 1 as one fleeing from a sword The **sword** represents either someone who is ready to kill using a sword or an attack from an enemy army. Alternate translation: “as though you were fleeing from someone who was chasing you with a sword” or “as though you were fleeing from an enemy army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 37 fz4e figs-metonymy כְּ⁠מִ⁠פְּנֵי־ חֶ֖רֶב 1 as from the face of a sword The **sword** represents either someone who is ready to kill using a sword or an attack from an enemy army. Alternate translation: “as though you were running away from someone who was chasing you with a sword” or “as though you were running away from an enemy army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 37 kn1c figs-metonymy תְּקוּמָ֔ה לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י אֹֽיְבֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 power to stand to the face of those who are hostile to you Standing before the enemies represents not falling when the enemies attack and fighting against them. Alternate translation: “power to resist your enemies when they attack you” or “power to fight back against your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 38 ae6m figs-personification וְ⁠אָכְלָ֣ה אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם אֶ֖רֶץ אֹיְבֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 and the land of those who are hostile to you will devour you Yahweh speaks about the enemies’ **land** as if it were a wild animal that would eat the Israelites. The word **devour** emphasizes that most of the Israelites will die there. Alternate translation: “and you will die in your enemies’ land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LEV 26 39 dj82 וְ⁠הַ⁠נִּשְׁאָרִ֣ים בָּ⁠כֶ֗ם 1 And the ones who are remaining among you Alternate translation: “And those of you who do not die” +LEV 26 39 rvh2 יִמַּ֨קּוּ֙ בַּֽ⁠עֲוֺנָ֔⁠ם 1 will rot in their iniquity To **rot** in their * iniquity** represents wasting away because of their sins. +LEV 26 39 yg26 figs-metonymy בַּ⁠עֲוֺנֹ֥ת אֲבֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 in the iniquities of their fathers Here, **their fathers** represents their ancestors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 40 dys3 figs-metonymy עֲוֺ֣ן אֲבֹתָ֔⁠ם 1 the iniquity of their fathers Here, **their fathers** represents their ancestors. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 40 bz79 בְּ⁠מַעֲלָ֖⁠ם אֲשֶׁ֣ר מָֽעֲלוּ־ בִ֑⁠י 1 in their unfaithfulness which they acted unfaithfully against me Alternate translation: “the way that they were unfaithful to me and tuned against me after I had been so good to them” +LEV 26 41 n8ms figs-metaphor אֵלֵ֤ךְ עִמָּ⁠ם֙ בְּ⁠קֶ֔רִי 1 went against them in opposition To go **against them** represents opposing them. Alternate translation: “opposed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 26 41 u7i8 figs-synecdoche אוֹ־ אָ֣ז יִכָּנַ֗ע לְבָבָ⁠ם֙ הֶֽ⁠עָרֵ֔ל 1 if then their uncircumcised hearts become humbled Here the term **uncircumcised hearts** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “if they will be humble instead of stubbornly disobedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LEV 26 42 zpa2 figs-metonymy וְ⁠זָכַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־ בְּרִיתִ֣⁠י יַעֲק֑וֹב 1 then I will remember my covenant with Jacob Here, **remember** represents fulfilling his covenant. Alternate translation: “then I will fulfill the covenant I made with Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 26 42 r2ih figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠אָ֥רֶץ אֶזְכֹּֽר 1 And I will remember the land Here, **remember** represents fulfilling his promise concerning the land. Alternate translation: “And I will fulfill my promise about the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 43 u8qp figs-activepassive 1 The land will be abandoned by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The people of Israel will abandon their land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 26 43 cad8 figs-personification 1 so it will be pleased with its Sabbaths Yahweh speaks about the land as if it were a person who is happy about resting, because no one will be planting seed or growing crops on it. This will allow the land to become more fertile. Alternate translation: “so it will benefit from the Sabbaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LEV 26 44 i5np 0 General Information: This concludes Yahweh’s message to Moses at Mount Sinai regarding the blessings for obedience and the punishments for disobedience. +LEV 26 43 u8qp figs-activepassive וְ⁠הָ⁠אָרֶץ֩ תֵּעָזֵ֨ב מֵ⁠הֶ֜ם 1 And the land was abandoned by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The people of Israel will abandon their land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 26 43 cad8 figs-personification וְ⁠תִ֣רֶץ אֶת־ שַׁבְּתֹתֶ֗י⁠הָ 1 and it will rejoice with its sabbaths Yahweh speaks about the land as if it were a person who **will rejoice** about resting, because no one will be planting seed or growing crops on it. This will allow the land to become more fertile. Alternate translation: “so it will benefit from the sabbaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LEV 26 45 x7p9 figs-metonymy וְ⁠זָכַרְתִּ֥י לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּרִ֣ית רִאשֹׁנִ֑ים 1 And I will remember for their sake the covenant with their ancestors Here, **remember** represents fulfilling his covenant. Alternate translation: “And I will fulfill my covenant with their ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 26 45 b2vu figs-metonymy 1 in the sight of the nations This represents the knowledge of the nations. Alternate translation: “in the knowledge of the nations” or “and the nations knew about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 26 45 js1r figs-metonymy 1 the nations This represents the people of the nations. Alternate translation: “the people of the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 433eaae0f15285c983c071f8689cbf4613838f6c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 20:48:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 142/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 671f696ab3..0127fb466a 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1127,8 +1127,8 @@ LEV 26 42 r2ih figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָ⁠אָ֥רֶץ אֶזְכֹּֽר 1 And LEV 26 43 u8qp figs-activepassive וְ⁠הָ⁠אָרֶץ֩ תֵּעָזֵ֨ב מֵ⁠הֶ֜ם 1 And the land was abandoned by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The people of Israel will abandon their land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 26 43 cad8 figs-personification וְ⁠תִ֣רֶץ אֶת־ שַׁבְּתֹתֶ֗י⁠הָ 1 and it will rejoice with its sabbaths Yahweh speaks about the land as if it were a person who **will rejoice** about resting, because no one will be planting seed or growing crops on it. This will allow the land to become more fertile. Alternate translation: “so it will benefit from the sabbaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LEV 26 45 x7p9 figs-metonymy וְ⁠זָכַרְתִּ֥י לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּרִ֣ית רִאשֹׁנִ֑ים 1 And I will remember for their sake the covenant with their ancestors Here, **remember** represents fulfilling his covenant. Alternate translation: “And I will fulfill my covenant with their ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 45 b2vu figs-metonymy 1 in the sight of the nations This represents the knowledge of the nations. Alternate translation: “in the knowledge of the nations” or “and the nations knew about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 45 js1r figs-metonymy 1 the nations This represents the people of the nations. Alternate translation: “the people of the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 45 b2vu figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֗ם 1 in the eyes of the nations Here , **eyes** represents the knowledge of the nations. Alternate translation: “in the knowledge of the nations” or “and the nations knew about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 26 45 js1r figs-metonymy הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֗ם 1 the nations Here, **nations** represents the people of the nations. Alternate translation: “the people of the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 27 intro u6u9 0 # Leviticus 27 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dedicated to Yahweh

This chapter records the manner in which people make vows of dedication to Yahweh. There are many reasons why a person would dedicate something to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/vow]]) LEV 27 2 ds9v figs-explicit 1 If anyone makes a special vow to Yahweh In this case the vow would involve giving oneself or another person to God. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “If anyone vows to give someone to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LEV 27 2 w962 figs-explicit 1 use the following valuations Instead of giving the person, he would give the Lord a certain amount of silver. AT “use the following values as your gift to the Lord in place of the person” or “give the Lord the following amounts of silver instead of the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From df75ea6329ce5624ecea456588cac314850895c3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 21:36:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 144/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index a5aa5e7398..9a554a6cbf 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n\n\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n\n\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n\n\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n\n\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\n\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis? +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n\n\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n\n\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n\n\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n\n\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From f1a6668f49147da50cf8b6f177b1f8164cd8a99c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 21:36:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 145/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 9a554a6cbf..4bf427e897 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n\n\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n\n\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n\n\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n\n\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n\n\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n\n\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n\n\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n\n\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 7dd5c3c2729fde9620c7d1da17c2dce7e4b2880c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 21:51:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 146/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 4bf427e897..ae0874183f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n\n\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n\n\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n\n\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n\n\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\n\nPaul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])\n\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 45d238f94d5fe1b07ab4c459d9852b34d8690fd6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 21:56:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 147/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index ae0874183f..3a08f3109d 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From ffef7de6b4b03630da8a31721c6890c1f0396243 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 22:00:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 148/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 3a08f3109d..86dcdeb23e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language would talk about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 339df37b74a94ad687fc0f3a4d5336a08081a7e0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 22:00:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 149/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 86dcdeb23e..37fb1c8519 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language would talk about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From f32da5578b841b18f013dfb41186a672f2aa6294 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 22:02:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 150/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 37fb1c8519..0f023d88e9 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Meat sacrificed to idol\n\nPaul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don’t eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Things sacrificed to idols\n\nIn Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul explains how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From fd0502b98915c59de071d18e736ae0591c3e1a8a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 22:03:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 151/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 0f023d88e9..cd16820a00 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Things sacrificed to idols\n\nIn Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul explains how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Things sacrificed to idols\n\nIn Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to explain how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 5e1343ed60cc7776a108fff3c0747b0e23ade109 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 22:15:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 152/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index cd16820a00..05b0af378e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Things sacrificed to idols\n\nIn Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to explain how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), \n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Things sacrificed to idols\n\nIn Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to explain how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), Paul states that the “rock” from which the Israelites received water “was Christ.” This metaphor can be interpreted in two major ways: (1) Paul could be saying that Christ was the one who made the rock provide the Israelites with water. (2) Paul could be saying that the rock provided water for the Israelites like Christ provides salvation for those who believe in him. (3) Paul could be saying that Christ was somehow present in or with the rock itself. Since Paul’s sentence allows for a number of interpretations, if possible you should also allow for a number of interpretations with your translation. Also, consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “that rock was Christ.”\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 58bd9b4fcf8012c19ac8652524efb23d61f0586d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 22:29:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 153/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 05b0af378e..0483fd473b 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 27 tyca grammar-connect-time-sequential μή πως ἄλλοις κηρύξας 1 Here, **having preached to others** could identify: (1) what Paul has done before he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, after having preached to others” (2) a contrast a with how he **might be disqualified**. Alternate translation: “lest, although I have preached to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified Here, **disqualified** continues the athletic imagery. An athlete who is **disqualified** is unable to win the competition and receive the prize. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he wants to be able to receive a reward from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I myself might not reach the goal” or “I myself might fail to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 27 s3sd figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God might disqualify even me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Things sacrificed to idols\n\nIn Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to explain how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), Paul states that the “rock” from which the Israelites received water “was Christ.” This metaphor can be interpreted in two major ways: (1) Paul could be saying that Christ was the one who made the rock provide the Israelites with water. (2) Paul could be saying that the rock provided water for the Israelites like Christ provides salvation for those who believe in him. (3) Paul could be saying that Christ was somehow present in or with the rock itself. Since Paul’s sentence allows for a number of interpretations, if possible you should also allow for a number of interpretations with your translation. Also, consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “that rock was Christ.”\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), \n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\n\n +1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. On food (8:1–11:1)\n * Warning from Israelite history (10:1–12)\n * Encouragement and command (10:13–14)\n * The Lord’s Supper and food offered to idols (10:15–22)\n * Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Exodus and wilderness journey\n\nIn the first half of this chapter, Paul consistently refers to the narrative about how God rescued the Israelites from Egypt and led them through the wilderness so that they could take possession of the land he had promised to give them. He mentions multiple stories from this narrative. God led the Israelites by appearing as a pillar of cloud, and he made a path through the sea for them (see [Exodus 13:17–14:31](exo/13/17.md)). God miraculously provided them with food while they were traveling through the desert (see [Exodus 16](exo/16/01.md)), and he also provided water from a rock for them to drink (see [Exodus 17:1–7](exo/17/01.md) and [Numbers 20:2–13](num/29/02.md)). Despite this, the Israelites often grumbled against God and against their leaders, so God punished them by letting them die in the wilderness (see [Numbers 14:20–35](num/14/20.md)). The Israelites also worshiped other gods (see [Exodus 32:1–6](exo/32/01.md)) and committed sexual immorality (see [Numbers 25:1–9](num/25/01.md)), so God again punished them. Other times when the Israelites complained about their leaders, God sent snakes (see [Numbers 21:5–6](num/21/05.md)) or a plague ([Numbers 16:41–50](num/16/41.md)) to kill them. Paul’s point here is that God acted to save the Israelites, but when they disobeyed or grumbled, God punished them. Paul wants the Corinthians to understand this as a warning to them as well. They should not be like the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/desert]])\n\n### “Spiritual”\n\nIn [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul states that the Israelites ate “spiritual food” and drank “spiritual drink” from a “spiritual rock.” By “spiritual,” Paul could be referring to the action of God’s Spirit, who provided the food and drink from the rock. By using “spiritual,” Paul could also be identifying the “food,” “drink,” and “rock” as prefigurations or types of the Lord’s Supper, which he discusses later in the chapter. Or, he could simply want the reader to think of the Lord’s Supper without drawing any direct connection. Consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “spiritual” here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### The Lord’s Supper\n\nIn [10:16–17](../10/16.md), [21](../10/21.md), Paul refers to the Lord’s Supper. He describes the unity that comes with the Lord and with other believers when believers partake of the “cup” and the “table,” that is, the bread and the wine. He then argues that this unity means that participating in the Lord’s Supper is incompatible with participating in meals that unite one to idols, or rather, to the demons that the idols represent. In these verses, use words and phrases that fit with how your language talks about the Lord’s Supper. \n\n### Things sacrificed to idols\n\nIn Paul’s culture, animals were often sacrificed to the gods. After the animal was slaughtered, the people who were participating in the worship would eat parts of the animal. Other times, some of the meat would be sold in the market, as Paul implies in [10:25](../10/25.md). For most people who were not wealthy, participating in worship with a sacrifice or buying sacrificed meat in the market were two of the few situations in which they could eat meat. Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to explain how the Corinthians should think about eating or not eating this meat. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [10:16](../10/16.md), [18–19](../10/18.md), [22](../10/22.md), [29–30](../10/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### “That rock was Christ”\n\nIn [10:4](../10/04.md), Paul states that the “rock” from which the Israelites received water “was Christ.” This metaphor can be interpreted in two major ways: (1) Paul could be saying that Christ was the one who made the rock provide the Israelites with water. (2) Paul could be saying that the rock provided water for the Israelites like Christ provides salvation for those who believe in him. (3) Paul could be saying that Christ was somehow present in or with the rock itself. Since Paul’s sentence allows for a number of interpretations, if possible you should also allow for a number of interpretations with your translation. Also, consider the theology of the group you are translating for to decide exactly how to express “that rock was Christ.”\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Quoting the Corinthians\n\nIn [10:23](../10/23.md), Paul quotes words that the Corinthians have said or that they wrote to him. The ULT indicates these words by putting quotation marks around them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate that an author is quoting someone else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])\n\n### Are [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) a parenthesis?\n\nIn [10:25–27](../10/25.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that they can eat any food from the marketplace or in someone’s home without asking about whether it was sacrificed to an idol. Everything belongs to God, so whether it was sacrificed or not does not matter. However, in [10:28–29a](../10/28.md), Paul gives an exception: if someone tells you directly that the food was sacrificed to an idol, you should not eat it for the sake of the person who told you. Immediately after, however, in [10:29b](../10/29.md), he asks a question that implies that one’s freedom should be constrained by some other person’s ideas about right and wrong. This does not seem to fit with the exception Paul has given in [10:28–29a](../10/28.md). Most likely, Paul means [10:28–29a](../10/28.md) to be understood as a side note, and [10:29b](../10/29.md) follows directly from [10:27](../10/27.md). In order to indicate this, the UST puts parentheses around [10:28–29a](../10/28.md). Consider using a natural way in your language to indicate a side note or a digression from the main argument. \n 1CO 10 1 gce5 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 passed through the sea Here, **For** introduces what Paul says about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). What Paul says in these verses explains what he said the previous verse about how he and other believers should work hard not to be “disqualified” ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The Israelites whom God took out of Egypt were “disqualified,” and believers should work not to be like them. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example or support. Alternate translation: “Here is an example:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 1 navn figs-litotes οὐ θέλω…ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 our fathers Here Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1CO 10 1 hhts figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…οἱ πατέρες 1 our fathers Although the words **brothers** and **fathers** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers** and **fathers**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … fathers and mothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From cae83ac1cf396a52439d8a30cdc6582237449ee4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 22:31:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 154/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 0483fd473b..ac3a510a2e 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1415,7 +1415,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 33 hd2z figs-nominaladj τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of many people” or “of everyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 10 33 qsg4 figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 the many If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 11 1 h5fg 0 Connecting Statement: After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers. +1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε 1 Connecting Statement: 1CO 11 2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 you remember me in everything “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them. 1CO 11 3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 Now I want This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.” 1CO 11 3 hbt7 ἡ κεφαλὴ…ἐστιν 1 is the head has authority over From 8385aeb7137f3cbe58e8921e8fc21bf025482d4e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 22:45:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 155/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index ac3a510a2e..955abfc99b 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1415,7 +1415,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 33 hd2z figs-nominaladj τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of many people” or “of everyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 10 33 qsg4 figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 the many If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε 1 Connecting Statement: +1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also {imitate} Christ” 1CO 11 2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 you remember me in everything “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them. 1CO 11 3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 Now I want This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.” 1CO 11 3 hbt7 ἡ κεφαλὴ…ἐστιν 1 is the head has authority over From 357bfe2450d5b364dd00616189ce676d0661f49f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 23:27:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 156/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 955abfc99b..1a5c8cc691 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1416,7 +1416,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 33 qsg4 figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 the many If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also {imitate} Christ” -1CO 11 2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 you remember me in everything “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them. +1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 11 2 qsk9 figs-idiom πάντα 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 11 2 ttwu figs-metaphor κατέχετε 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 11 2 akeb figs-metaphor παρέδωκα 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 Now I want This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.” 1CO 11 3 hbt7 ἡ κεφαλὴ…ἐστιν 1 is the head has authority over 1CO 11 3 en95 κεφαλὴ…γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ 2 a man is the head of a woman This could mean: (1) men are to have authority over women. (2) the husband is to have authority over the wife. From ce71bf9f9186f4df27ae758d4cb63f7d8bd0b9b2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 23:30:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 157/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 1a5c8cc691..f27988f627 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1416,9 +1416,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 33 qsg4 figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 the many If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also {imitate} Christ” -1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything Here, **Now** introduces a whole new section in Paul’s argument. He **Now** begins speaking about proper behavior during worship. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 11 2 qsk9 figs-idiom πάντα 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 2 ttwu figs-metaphor κατέχετε 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 11 2 bwes figs-abstractnouns τὰς παραδόσεις 1 you remember me in everything 1CO 11 2 akeb figs-metaphor παρέδωκα 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 Now I want This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.” 1CO 11 3 hbt7 ἡ κεφαλὴ…ἐστιν 1 is the head has authority over From 2e4b080d828d351f7c0d919c38de6ac36b5b6e3b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 23:31:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 158/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f27988f627..bf95390362 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also {imitate} Christ” 1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything Here, **Now** introduces a whole new section in Paul’s argument. He **Now** begins speaking about proper behavior during worship. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1CO 11 2 qsk9 figs-idiom πάντα 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 11 2 qsk9 figs-idiom πάντα 1 you remember me in everything Here, **all things** refers to anything the Corinthians might do. If your readers would misunderstand **in all things**, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the same idea in your language. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 2 ttwu figs-metaphor κατέχετε 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 2 bwes figs-abstractnouns τὰς παραδόσεις 1 you remember me in everything 1CO 11 2 akeb figs-metaphor παρέδωκα 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 73bd169fb2350f047d00f08b7f392a944ef9bfad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 23:36:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 159/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index bf95390362..257695768c 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1418,9 +1418,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also {imitate} Christ” 1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything Here, **Now** introduces a whole new section in Paul’s argument. He **Now** begins speaking about proper behavior during worship. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 11 2 qsk9 figs-idiom πάντα 1 you remember me in everything Here, **all things** refers to anything the Corinthians might do. If your readers would misunderstand **in all things**, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the same idea in your language. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 11 2 ttwu figs-metaphor κατέχετε 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 11 2 bwes figs-abstractnouns τὰς παραδόσεις 1 you remember me in everything -1CO 11 2 akeb figs-metaphor παρέδωκα 1 you remember me in everything (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 11 2 ttwu figs-metaphor τὰς παραδόσεις κατέχετε 1 you remember me in everything Here, Paul speaks as if **the traditions** were something physical that the Corinthians would **hold firmly to**. By using this figure of speech, Paul wishes to emphasize that the Corinthians are believing the traditions and acting in line with them as carefully and consistently as if they were physically holding on to them. If your readers would misunderstanding **hold firmly**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you keep the traditions” or “you follow the traditions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 11 2 bwes figs-abstractnouns τὰς παραδόσεις 1 you remember me in everything If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **traditions**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with a verb such as “teach” or “learn.” Alternate translation: “to the things you learned from me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1CO 11 2 akeb figs-metaphor παρέδωκα ὑμῖν 1 you remember me in everything Here Paul speaks as if the **traditions** were a physical object that he **delivered** to the Corinthians. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that he truly taught them **the traditions**, and they now know these **traditions** as well as if they held them in their hands. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I instructed you” or “I told them to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 Now I want This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.” 1CO 11 3 hbt7 ἡ κεφαλὴ…ἐστιν 1 is the head has authority over 1CO 11 3 en95 κεφαλὴ…γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ 2 a man is the head of a woman This could mean: (1) men are to have authority over women. (2) the husband is to have authority over the wife. From ff7bb3707218526bb00f5141961c70d60484935e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: stephenwunrow Date: Thu, 12 May 2022 23:41:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 160/166] Edit 'en_tn_47-1CO.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 257695768c..fdef0d7be8 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1417,6 +1417,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord’s Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women

Paul’s instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord’s Supper

There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord’s Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord’s Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ’s death if they participated in the Lord’s Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses “head” as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person’s actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used “head” in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also {imitate} Christ” 1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything Here, **Now** introduces a whole new section in Paul’s argument. He **Now** begins speaking about proper behavior during worship. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 11 2 ibw5 figs-metonymy μου 1 you remember me in everything Here, **me** refers specifically to what Paul teaches and how Paul behaves. If your readers would misunderstand **me**, you could clarify exactly what about **me** Paul has in mind. Alternate translation: “my doctrine and behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 11 2 qsk9 figs-idiom πάντα 1 you remember me in everything Here, **all things** refers to anything the Corinthians might do. If your readers would misunderstand **in all things**, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the same idea in your language. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 2 ttwu figs-metaphor τὰς παραδόσεις κατέχετε 1 you remember me in everything Here, Paul speaks as if **the traditions** were something physical that the Corinthians would **hold firmly to**. By using this figure of speech, Paul wishes to emphasize that the Corinthians are believing the traditions and acting in line with them as carefully and consistently as if they were physically holding on to them. If your readers would misunderstanding **hold firmly**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you keep the traditions” or “you follow the traditions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 2 bwes figs-abstractnouns τὰς παραδόσεις 1 you remember me in everything If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **traditions**, you could express the idea by using a relative clause with a verb such as “teach” or “learn.” Alternate translation: “to the things you learned from me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From a6ae425ab62a21b7c599295a74b1529788872df7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 13 May 2022 13:23:08 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 162/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 50 ++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+), 27 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 0127fb466a..c1e977d8ec 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1130,34 +1130,30 @@ LEV 26 45 x7p9 figs-metonymy וְ⁠זָכַרְתִּ֥י לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בּ LEV 26 45 b2vu figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֗ם 1 in the eyes of the nations Here , **eyes** represents the knowledge of the nations. Alternate translation: “in the knowledge of the nations” or “and the nations knew about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 26 45 js1r figs-metonymy הַ⁠גּוֹיִ֗ם 1 the nations Here, **nations** represents the people of the nations. Alternate translation: “the people of the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 27 intro u6u9 0 # Leviticus 27 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dedicated to Yahweh

This chapter records the manner in which people make vows of dedication to Yahweh. There are many reasons why a person would dedicate something to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/vow]]) -LEV 27 2 ds9v figs-explicit 1 If anyone makes a special vow to Yahweh In this case the vow would involve giving oneself or another person to God. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “If anyone vows to give someone to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 27 2 w962 figs-explicit 1 use the following valuations Instead of giving the person, he would give the Lord a certain amount of silver. AT “use the following values as your gift to the Lord in place of the person” or “give the Lord the following amounts of silver instead of the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 27 3 dj1b 1 Your standard value Alternate translation: “The amount to pay” or “You must pay” -LEV 27 3 ju46 translate-numbers 1 twenty … sixty … fifty Alternate translation: “20…60…50” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -LEV 27 3 hy8z translate-bweight 1 fifty shekels of silver If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “fifty pieces of silver, each of which weighs ten grams” or “five hundred grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 3 fr3t translate-bweight 1 after the shekel of the sanctuary There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. It weighed about 11 grams. Alternate translation: “Use the kind of shekel that is used in the sanctuary” or “When you weigh the silver, use the weight that is used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 4 mcw3 translate-bweight 1 thirty shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “thirty pieces of silver, each of which weighs ten grams” or “three hundred grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 5 pit4 1 your standard value Alternate translation: “the amount to pay” or “you must pay” -LEV 27 5 e8ag translate-bweight 1 twenty shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “twenty pieces of silver” or “two hundred grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 5 y1cx figs-ellipsis 1 for the female ten shekels The phrases “of that age” and “your standard value must be” are left out, but are meant to be understood. Alternate translation: “for the female of that age your standard value must be ten shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LEV 27 5 z1uc translate-bweight 1 ten shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “ten pieces of silver” or “one hundred grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 6 r5vd translate-bweight 1 five shekels of silver If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “five pieces of silver” or “fifty grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 6 r13l translate-bweight 1 three shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “three pieces of silver” or “thirty grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 7 cry4 1 sixty years old and up Alternate translation: “sixty years old and older” -LEV 27 7 xmg4 translate-numbers 1 sixty … fifteen … ten Alternate translation: “60…15…10” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -LEV 27 7 n5vt translate-bweight 1 fifteen shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “fifteen pieces of silver” or “150 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 7 wau8 figs-ellipsis 1 for a female ten shekels The phrases “of that age” and “your standard value must be” are left out, but are meant to be understood. Alternate translation: “for a female of that age your standard value must be ten shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LEV 27 8 ucc6 figs-activepassive 1 the person being given must be presented to the priest If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. AT “he must present to the priest the person he is giving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 9 ax5s 1 set apart to him Alternate translation: “set apart to Yahweh” -LEV 27 10 a66v figs-activepassive 1 both it and the one for which it is exchanged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “both it and the one he exchanges it for” or the animals can be referred to simply as “both animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 11 dz9h figs-metaphor 1 is in fact unclean, so that Yahweh will not accept it If Yahweh will not accept a certain animal as an offering, the animal is spoken of as if it were physically dirty. It may be unclean because it is a certain kind of animal or because it has a defect. Alternate translation: “is in fact one that Yahweh will not accept” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 27 12 yzw5 1 market value This is the value the animal is normally worth when someone buys or sells it. -LEV 27 13 f9my 1 wishes to redeem it Alternate translation: “wishes to buy it back” -LEV 27 15 ugc7 translate-fraction 1 he must add a fifth of its value to its redemption price A “fifth” is a part of something that is divided into five equal parts. Alternate translation: “he must divide the value of the house into five equal parts, add the amount equal to one of those parts, and pay all of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) -LEV 27 16 l7we figs-metonymy 1 a homer of barley will be valued at Here “a homer of barley” represents a piece of land that would need one homer of barley in order to plant on all of it. Alternate translation: “a piece of land that requires one homer of barley in order to plant all of it will be valued at” or ‘the value of land that requires one homer of barley will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 27 16 ub6b translate-bvolume 1 homer A homer is 220 liters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) +LEV 27 2 ds9v figs-explicit אִ֕ישׁ כִּ֥י יַפְלִ֖א נֶ֑דֶר בְּ⁠עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֥ נְפָשֹׁ֖ת לַֽ⁠יהוָֽה 1 If a man vows a vow according to your valuation of persons to Yahweh In this case the **vow** would involve giving oneself or another person to God. This can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “If anyone vows to give someone to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 27 2 w962 figs-explicit בְּ⁠עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֥ נְפָשֹׁ֖ת 1 according to your valuation of persons Instead of giving the person, he would give the Lord a certain amount of silver. Alternate translation: “according to the following values for the person” or “according to the following amounts of silver instead of the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 27 3 dj1b עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֙…עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֗ 1 your valuation … your valuation Alternate translation: “the amount … the amount” +LEV 27 3 hy8z translate-bweight חֲמִשִּׁ֛ים שֶׁ֥קֶל כֶּ֖סֶף 1 50 shekels of silver If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “50 pieces of silver, each of which weighs ten grams” or “500 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 3 fr3t translate-bweight בְּ⁠שֶׁ֥קֶל הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 according to the shekel of the holy place There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. It weighed about 11 grams. Alternate translation: “the kind of shekel that is used in the sanctuary” or “the weight that is used in the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 4 mcw3 translate-bweight שְׁלֹשִׁ֥ים שָֽׁקֶל 1 30 shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “30 pieces of silver, each of which weighs ten grams” or “300 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 5 pit4 עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֛ 1 your valuation Alternate translation: “the amount you must pay” +LEV 27 5 e8ag translate-bweight עֶשְׂרִ֣ים שְׁקָלִ֑ים 1 20 shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “20 pieces of silver” or “200 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 5 y1cx figs-ellipsis וְ⁠לַ⁠נְּקֵבָ֖ה עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת שְׁקָלִֽים 1 and for the female ten shekels The phrases “of that age” and “your standard value must be” are left out, but are meant to be understood. Alternate translation: “for the female of that age your standard value must be ten shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +LEV 27 5 z1uc translate-bweight עֲשֶׂ֥רֶת שְׁקָלִֽים 1 ten shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “ten pieces of silver” or “100 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 6 r5vd translate-bweight חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה שְׁקָלִ֖ים כָּ֑סֶף 1 five shekels of silver If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “five pieces of silver” or “50 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 6 r13l translate-bweight שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת שְׁקָלִ֖ים כָּֽסֶף 1 three shekels of silver If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “three pieces of silver” or “30 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 7 cry4 שִׁשִּׁ֨ים שָׁנָ֤ה וָ⁠מַ֨עְלָ⁠ה֙ 1 60 years and up Alternate translation: “60 years old and older” +LEV 27 7 n5vt translate-bweight חֲמִשָּׁ֥ה עָשָׂ֖ר שָׁ֑קֶל 1 fifteen shekels If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two ways of doing it. Alternate translation: “15 pieces of silver” or “150 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 7 wau8 figs-ellipsis וְ⁠לַ⁠נְּקֵבָ֖ה עֲשָׂרָ֥ה שְׁקָלִֽים 1 and for the female ten shekels The phrases “of that age” and “your standard value must be” are left out, but are meant to be understood. Alternate translation: “for a female of that age your standard value must be ten shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +LEV 27 10 a66v figs-activepassive וְ⁠הָֽיָה־ ה֥וּא וּ⁠תְמוּרָת֖⁠וֹ יִֽהְיֶה־ קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 then it will be and the exchanged one will be set apart If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will set apart both it and the one he exchanges it for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 11 dz9h figs-metaphor וְ⁠אִם֙ כָּל־ בְּהֵמָ֣ה טְמֵאָ֔ה אֲ֠שֶׁר לֹא־ יַקְרִ֧יבוּ מִמֶּ֛⁠נָּה קָרְבָּ֖ן לַֽ⁠יהוָ֑ה 1 And if any animal is unclean from which an offering must not be offered to Yahweh If Yahweh will not accept a certain animal as an offering, the animal is spoken of as if it were physically dirty. It may be unclean because it is a certain kind of animal or because it has a defect. Alternate translation: “And if it is in fact one that Yahweh will not accept” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 27 12 yzw5 כְּ⁠עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֥ 1 According to the valuation of you This refers to the value the animal is normally worth when someone buys or sells it. +LEV 27 13 f9my גָּאֹ֖ל יִגְאָלֶ֑⁠נָּה 1 he ever redeems it Alternate translation: “he every buys it back” +LEV 27 15 ugc7 translate-fraction וְ֠⁠יָסַף חֲמִישִׁ֧ית כֶּֽסֶף־ עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֛ עָלָ֖י⁠ו 1 then he must add a fifth of the silver of your valuation to it A **fifth** is a part of something that is divided into five equal parts. Alternate translation: “then he must divide the value of the house into five equal parts, add the amount equal to one of those parts, and pay all of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +LEV 27 16 l7we figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָיָ֥ה עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠פִ֣י זַרְע֑⁠וֹ זֶ֚רַע חֹ֣מֶר שְׂעֹרִ֔ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים שֶׁ֥קֶל כָּֽסֶף 1 then your valuation will be in proportion to its seed—a homer of barley seed for 50 shekels of silver Here, **a homer of barley seed** represents a piece of land that would need one homer of barley in order to plant on all of it. Alternate translation: “then you will value a piece of land that requires one homer of barley in order to plant all of it at 50 shekels of silver” or ‘then the value of land that requires one homer of barley will be 50 shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 27 16 ub6b translate-bvolume חֹ֣מֶר 1 a homer of A **homer** is 220 liters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) LEV 27 16 pve5 translate-bweight בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים שֶׁ֥קֶל כָּֽסֶף 1 for fifty shekels of silver If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two way of doing it. Alternate translation: “50 pieces of silver, each of which weighs ten grams” or “500 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 17 b2qb 1 the year of Jubilee This occurs every 50 years. See how you translated “Jubilee” in [Leviticus 25:10](../25/10.md). +LEV 27 17 b2qb מִ⁠שְּׁנַ֥ת הַ⁠יֹּבֵ֖ל 1 during the year of Jubilee The **Jubilee** occurs every 50 years. See how you translated **Jubilee** in [Leviticus 25:10](../25/10.md). LEV 27 17 wa1x figs-metaphor 1 the valuation of it will stand Here, **Stand** represents “remain” or “remain the same.” Alternate translation: “its value will remain the same” or “its value will be the full amount” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 27 18 as3z figs-activepassive 1 the valuation of it must be reduced If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he must reduce the estimated value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 27 20 kl7j figs-activepassive 1 it cannot be redeemed any more If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he can no longer buy it back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 73661731e03d9903823fade7f836087425ce4998 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 13 May 2022 13:35:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 163/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 22 ++++++++++------------ 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index c1e977d8ec..21631b1de5 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1154,19 +1154,17 @@ LEV 27 16 l7we figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָיָ֥ה עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠ LEV 27 16 ub6b translate-bvolume חֹ֣מֶר 1 a homer of A **homer** is 220 liters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) LEV 27 16 pve5 translate-bweight בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים שֶׁ֥קֶל כָּֽסֶף 1 for fifty shekels of silver If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two way of doing it. Alternate translation: “50 pieces of silver, each of which weighs ten grams” or “500 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) LEV 27 17 b2qb מִ⁠שְּׁנַ֥ת הַ⁠יֹּבֵ֖ל 1 during the year of Jubilee The **Jubilee** occurs every 50 years. See how you translated **Jubilee** in [Leviticus 25:10](../25/10.md). -LEV 27 17 wa1x figs-metaphor 1 the valuation of it will stand Here, **Stand** represents “remain” or “remain the same.” Alternate translation: “its value will remain the same” or “its value will be the full amount” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 27 18 as3z figs-activepassive 1 the valuation of it must be reduced If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he must reduce the estimated value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 20 kl7j figs-activepassive 1 it cannot be redeemed any more If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he can no longer buy it back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 20 grb9 figs-explicit 1 If he does not redeem the field The time for redeeming the field can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: If he does not redeem the field before the year of Jubilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 27 21 ip9r 1 in the year of Jubilee This was a year when the Jews had to return land to its original owners and set slaves free See how you translated it in [Leviticus 25:13](../25/13.md) Alternate translation: “in the year of restoration” or “the year for you to return land and free slaves” -LEV 27 21 nx1t figs-activepassive 1 that has been completely given to Yahweh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone has completely given to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 24 aiu1 1 the man from whom it was bought … the land’s owner These two phases refer to the same person. Normally the land would be bought from its owner. -LEV 27 24 dd64 figs-activepassive 1 the man from whom it was bought If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man who sold it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 25 kd47 figs-activepassive 1 All the valuations must be set If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The priests must determine the estimated values” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 25 sj13 translate-bweight 1 by the weight of the sanctuary shekel There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 25 y6zj translate-bweight 1 Twenty gerahs must be the equivalent of one shekel The purpose of this sentence is to tell how much the sanctuary shekel weighs. The gerah was the smallest unit of weight that the Israelites used. Alternate translation: “One shekel must equal twenty gerahs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 17 wa1x figs-metaphor כְּ⁠עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֖ יָקֽוּם 1 according to your valuation it will stand Here, **stand** represents “remain” or “remain the same.” Alternate translation: “its value will remain the same” or “its value will be the full amount” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LEV 27 18 as3z figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִגְרַ֖ע מֵֽ⁠עֶרְכֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 and it must be reduced from your valuation If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and he must reduce the estimated value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 20 grb9 figs-explicit וְ⁠אִם־ לֹ֤א יִגְאַל֙ אֶת־ הַ⁠שָּׂדֶ֔ה 1 And if he does not redeem the field The time for redeeming the field can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “And if he does not redeem the field before the year of Jubilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 27 20 kl7j figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִגָּאֵ֖ל עֽוֹד 1 it cannot be redeemed again If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he can no longer buy it back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 21 ip9r בַ⁠יֹּבֵ֗ל 1 in the Jubilee The **Jubilee** was a year when the Jews had to return land to its original owners and set slaves free. See how you translated it in [Leviticus 25:13](../25/13.md). Alternate translation: “in the year of restoration” or “the year for you to return land and free slaves” +LEV 27 21 nx1t figs-activepassive הַ⁠חֵ֑רֶם 1 that has been dedicated by ban If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone has completely given to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 24 aiu1 לַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר קָנָ֖⁠הוּ מֵ⁠אִתּ֑⁠וֹ לַ⁠אֲשֶׁר־ ל֖⁠וֹ אֲחֻזַּ֥ת הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 to whom he bought it from, to whom belongs the possession of the land These two phases refer to the same person. Normally the land would be bought from its owner. +LEV 27 25 sj13 translate-bweight בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 by the shekel of the holy place There were shekels of different weights. This is the one that people had to use in the sanctuary of the sacred tent. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) +LEV 27 25 y6zj translate-bweight עֶשְׂרִ֥ים גֵּרָ֖ה יִהְיֶ֥ה הַ⁠שָּֽׁקֶל 1 20 gerahs must be the shekel The purpose of this sentence is to tell how much the sanctuary shekel weighs. The gerah was the smallest unit of weight that the Israelites used. Alternate translation: “one shekel must equal 20 gerahs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) LEV 27 25 b3gq translate-bweight עֶשְׂרִ֥ים גֵּרָ֖ה יִהְיֶ֥ה הַ⁠שָּֽׁקֶל 1 20 gerahs must be the shekel If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here is a way to do it. Alternate translation: “one shekel must weigh ten grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -LEV 27 26 pji9 1 No one may set apart Alternate translation: “No one may set apart to Yahweh” +LEV 27 26 pji9 לֹֽא־ יַקְדִּ֥ישׁ אִ֖ישׁ אֹת֑⁠וֹ 1 a man must not set it apart Alternate translation: “no one may set it apart to Yahweh” LEV 27 27 snk3 figs-activepassive 1 a fifth must be added to that value If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he must add a fifth to that value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 27 27 ng2y figs-activepassive 1 If the animal is not redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If the person does not buy back the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 27 27 vfw8 figs-activepassive 1 it is to be sold at the set value If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the priest must sell it at the set value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From a044ae6c2ca70b2a2f267a3d4ea78a02f7a6bfc7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 13 May 2022 13:50:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 164/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 30 ++++++++++++++---------------- 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 21631b1de5..9482cb1368 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1165,19 +1165,17 @@ LEV 27 25 sj13 translate-bweight בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ LEV 27 25 y6zj translate-bweight עֶשְׂרִ֥ים גֵּרָ֖ה יִהְיֶ֥ה הַ⁠שָּֽׁקֶל 1 20 gerahs must be the shekel The purpose of this sentence is to tell how much the sanctuary shekel weighs. The gerah was the smallest unit of weight that the Israelites used. Alternate translation: “one shekel must equal 20 gerahs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) LEV 27 25 b3gq translate-bweight עֶשְׂרִ֥ים גֵּרָ֖ה יִהְיֶ֥ה הַ⁠שָּֽׁקֶל 1 20 gerahs must be the shekel If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here is a way to do it. Alternate translation: “one shekel must weigh ten grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) LEV 27 26 pji9 לֹֽא־ יַקְדִּ֥ישׁ אִ֖ישׁ אֹת֑⁠וֹ 1 a man must not set it apart Alternate translation: “no one may set it apart to Yahweh” -LEV 27 27 snk3 figs-activepassive 1 a fifth must be added to that value If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he must add a fifth to that value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 27 ng2y figs-activepassive 1 If the animal is not redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “If the person does not buy back the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 27 vfw8 figs-activepassive 1 it is to be sold at the set value If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the priest must sell it at the set value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 28 adb4 figs-activepassive 1 nothing that a man devotes to Yahweh, from all that he has, whether human or animal, or his family land, may be sold or redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one may sell or redeem anything a man has devoted to Yahweh, from all that he has, whether it is a human, an animal, or his family land” or “If a man devotes to Yahweh anything he has, whether human or animal, or his family land, no one may sell or redeem it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 28 yy2u 1 Everything that is devoted is very holy to Yahweh Alternate translation: “Everything that anyone devotes to Yahweh is very holy to Yahweh” -LEV 27 29 k4sd figs-activepassive 1 No ransom may be paid If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “No one may pay a ransom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 29 epj5 figs-activepassive 1 for the person who is devoted for destruction If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for any person whom Yahweh has devoted to destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 29 i8d2 figs-explicit 1 for the person who is devoted for destruction Why a person would be devoted to destruction can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “for any person whom Yahweh has determined should die because of his sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LEV 27 29 uj9k figs-activepassive 1 That person must be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must put that person to death” or “you must kill that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 31 n1ly 1 If a man redeems any of his tithe Alternate translation: “If a man wants to buy back any of his tithe” -LEV 27 32 h1au figs-metonymy 1 whatever passes under the shepherd’s rod This refers to the way they would count their animals. Alternate translation: “when you count your animals by raising your shepherd rod and having them walk under it to the other side” or “when you count the animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 27 32 y6be figs-activepassive 1 one-tenth must be set apart to Yahweh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must set apart one-tenth to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 32 rzb2 1 one-tenth Alternate translation: “every tenth animal” -LEV 27 33 j4n9 1 then both it and that for which it is changed Alternate translation: “then both animals” -LEV 27 33 f56x figs-activepassive 1 It cannot be redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He cannot redeem it” or “He cannot buy it back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 27 34 dxq6 1 These are the commandments This is a summary statement. It refers to the commandments that were given in the past chapters. +LEV 27 27 ng2y figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִם־ לֹ֥א יִגָּאֵ֖ל 1 And if it is not redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And if the person does not buy back the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 27 vfw8 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִמְכַּ֥ר בְּ⁠עֶרְכֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 then it will be sold at your valuation If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “then the priest must sell it at the set value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 28 adb4 figs-activepassive כָּל־ חֵ֡רֶם אֲשֶׁ֣ר יַחֲרִם֩ אִ֨ישׁ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֜ה מִ⁠כָּל־ אֲשֶׁר־ ל֗⁠וֹ מֵ⁠אָדָ֤ם וּ⁠בְהֵמָה֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠שְּׂדֵ֣ה אֲחֻזָּת֔⁠וֹ לֹ֥א יִמָּכֵ֖ר וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִגָּאֵ֑ל 1 any dedicated thing that a man dedicates to Yahweh, from all that belongs to him, from human or animal, or from the field of his property, must not be sold and must not be redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one may sell or redeem anything a man has devoted to Yahweh, from all that he has, whether it is a human, an animal, or his family land” or “if a man devotes to Yahweh anything he has, whether human or animal, or his family land, no one may sell or redeem it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 28 yy2u כָּל־ חֵ֕רֶם קֹֽדֶשׁ־ קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 Every dedicated thing, it is the holiest holy thing to Yahweh Alternate translation: “Everything that anyone devotes to Yahweh is very holy to Yahweh” +LEV 27 29 i8d2 figs-explicit כָּל־ חֵ֗רֶם אֲשֶׁ֧ר יָחֳרַ֛ם 1 Every dedicated one who is dedicated Why a person would be dedicated to destruction can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “Any person whom Yahweh has determined should die because of his sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LEV 27 29 k4sd figs-activepassive לֹ֣א יִפָּדֶ֑ה 1 must not be ransomed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. “no one may pay a ransom for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 29 epj5 figs-activepassive מ֖וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 He must surely be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You must surely execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 31 n1ly וְ⁠אִם־ גָּאֹ֥ל יִגְאַ֛ל אִ֖ישׁ מִ⁠מַּֽעַשְׂר֑⁠וֹ 1 And if a man ever redeems some of his tenth Alternate translation: “And if a man wants to buy back any of his tithe” +LEV 27 32 h1au figs-metonymy כֹּ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־ יַעֲבֹ֖ר תַּ֣חַת הַ⁠שָּׁ֑בֶט 1 anything that passes under the rod This refers to the way they would count their animals. Alternate translation: “any animals you count by raising your shepherd rod and having them walk under it to the other side” or “any animals you count” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LEV 27 32 y6be figs-activepassive הָֽ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֕י יִֽהְיֶה־ קֹּ֖דֶשׁ לַֽ⁠יהוָֽה 1 the tenth must be set apart to Yahweh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must set apart one-tenth to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 32 rzb2 הָֽ⁠עֲשִׂירִ֕י 1 the tenth Alternate translation: “every tenth animal” +LEV 27 33 j4n9 וְ⁠הָֽיָה־ ה֧וּא וּ⁠תְמוּרָת֛⁠וֹ יִֽהְיֶה־ קֹ֖דֶשׁ 1 then it will be and its substitute will be set apart Alternate translation: “then you will set apart both animals” +LEV 27 33 f56x figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִגָּאֵֽל 1 It must not be redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He cannot redeem it” or “He cannot buy it back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LEV 27 34 dxq6 אֵ֣לֶּה הַ⁠מִּצְוֺ֗ת 1 These are the commandments This is a summary statement. It refers to the commandments that were given in the past chapters. From 9705c9deb5e019f5f2c7637fd45008567bdc8d31 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 13 May 2022 13:58:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 165/166] Edit 'en_tn_03-LEV.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 16 ++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 9482cb1368..46b822d747 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ LEV 1 9 zgz6 figs-metaphor רֵֽיחַ־ נִיח֖וֹחַ לַֽ⁠יהוָֽ LEV 1 11 k2uc לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 before the face of Yahweh Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” LEV 1 12 q6a3 figs-123person וְ⁠נִתַּ֤ח אֹת⁠וֹ֙ 1 And he is to cut it Here, **he** refers to the person offering the sacrifice. It can be stated in second person. Alternate translation: “And you must cut it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LEV 1 12 kx1v לִ⁠נְתָחָ֔י⁠ו וְ⁠אֶת־ רֹאשׁ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת־ פִּדְר֑⁠וֹ…עַל־ הָֽ⁠עֵצִים֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר עַל־ הָ⁠אֵ֔שׁ אֲשֶׁ֖ר עַל־ הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּֽחַ 1 pieces … head … fat … on the wood that is on the fire that is on the altar See how you translated these words in [Leviticus 1:7-9](./07.md). -LEV 1 13 ekd2 וְ⁠הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶב וְ⁠הַ⁠כְּרָעַ֖יִם יִרְחַ֣ץ בַּ⁠מָּ֑יִם…עֹלָ֣ה…אִשֵּׁ֛ה רֵ֥יחַ נִיחֹ֖חַ 1 inner parts … legs he must wash with water … burnt offering … sweet aroma … made … by fire See how you translated many of these words in [Leviticus 1:9](./09.md). +LEV 1 13 ekd2 וְ⁠הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶב וְ⁠הַ⁠כְּרָעַ֖יִם יִרְחַ֣ץ בַּ⁠מָּ֑יִם…עֹלָ֣ה…אִשֵּׁ֛ה רֵ֥יחַ נִיחֹ֖חַ 1 inner parts … legs he must wash with water … burnt offering … sweet aroma … made … by fire See how you translated many of these words in [Leviticus 1:9](../01/09.md). LEV 1 13 zf3d figs-metaphor רֵ֥יחַ נִיחֹ֖חַ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 a sweet aroma to Yahweh Yahweh being pleased with the sincere worshiper who offered the sacrifice is spoken of as if God were pleased with the **aroma** of the burning sacrifice. See how you translated this in [Leviticus 1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 1 13 tij4 figs-activepassive אִשֵּׁ֛ה 1 an offering made by fire Yahweh tells Moses that the priests must burn their offerings with **fire**. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a burnt offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 1 15 hs4d וּ⁠מָלַק֙ אֶת־ רֹאשׁ֔⁠וֹ 1 and wring off its head Alternate translation: “and twist off its head” @@ -49,10 +49,10 @@ LEV 2 7 l1pm translate-unknown מַרְחֶ֖שֶׁת 1 in a pan A **pan** is a LEV 2 7 s232 figs-activepassive תֵּעָשֶֽׂה 1 it must be made If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must make it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 2 8 vy42 figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֧ר יֵעָשֶׂ֛ה מֵ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה 1 that is made from these things If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you made from the flour and oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 2 8 j9l1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠הִקְרִיבָ⁠הּ֙ 1 And it will be presented If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you will present it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 2 9 t1ms וְ⁠הֵרִ֨ים הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֤ן מִן־ הַ⁠מִּנְחָה֙ אֶת־ אַזְכָּ֣רָתָ֔⁠הּ וְ⁠הִקְטִ֖יר הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֑חָ⁠ה אִשֵּׁ֛ה רֵ֥יחַ נִיחֹ֖חַ 1 And the priest will take from the grain offering its memorial portion, and he will burn it on the altar. It is an offering made by fire, a sweet aroma See how you translated many of these words in [Leviticus 2:2](./02.md). +LEV 2 9 t1ms וְ⁠הֵרִ֨ים הַ⁠כֹּהֵ֤ן מִן־ הַ⁠מִּנְחָה֙ אֶת־ אַזְכָּ֣רָתָ֔⁠הּ וְ⁠הִקְטִ֖יר הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֑חָ⁠ה אִשֵּׁ֛ה רֵ֥יחַ נִיחֹ֖חַ 1 And the priest will take from the grain offering its memorial portion, and he will burn it on the altar. It is an offering made by fire, a sweet aroma See how you translated many of these words in [Leviticus 2:2](../02/02.md). LEV 2 9 qgm4 אֶת־ אַזְכָּ֣רָתָ֔⁠הּ 1 its memorial offering The handful of the grain is a **memorial offering** that represents the whole grain offering. This means the whole offering belongs to Yahweh. See how you translated this in [Leviticus 2:2](../02/02.md). LEV 2 9 a7ye figs-metaphor רֵ֥יחַ נִיחֹ֖חַ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 a sweet aroma to Yahweh **Yahweh** being pleased with the sincere worshiper who offered the sacrifice is spoken of as if God were pleased with the **aroma** of the burning sacrifice. See how you translated this in [Leviticus 1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LEV 2 10 c6hv מֵ⁠אִשֵּׁ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 from the offerings made by fire to Yahweh See how you translated this in [Leviticus 2:3](./03.md). +LEV 2 10 c6hv מֵ⁠אִשֵּׁ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 from the offerings made by fire to Yahweh See how you translated this in [Leviticus 2:3](../02/03.md). LEV 2 10 y8u4 figs-activepassive מֵ⁠אִשֵּׁ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 from the offerings made by fire to Yahweh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from the burnt offerings to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 2 11 r3y3 figs-activepassive כָּל־ הַ⁠מִּנְחָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר תַּקְרִ֨יבוּ֙ לַ⁠יהוָ֔ה לֹ֥א תֵעָשֶׂ֖ה חָמֵ֑ץ 1 Every grain offering that you offer to Yahweh must not be made with yeast If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not use yeast in a grain offering that you offer to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 2 12 b9d5 תַּקְרִ֥יבוּ אֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 You will offer them Alternate translation: “You will offer the grain offerings made with leaven or honey” @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ LEV 6 25 cq5t figs-explicit תִּשָּׁחֵ֤ט הַֽ⁠חַטָּאת֙ ל LEV 6 25 zni8 figs-activepassive תִּשָּׁחֵ֤ט הַֽ⁠חַטָּאת֙ 1 the sin offering must be slaughtered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you must kill the sin offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 6 25 a3q6 figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁר֩ תִּשָּׁחֵ֨ט הָ⁠עֹלָ֜ה 1 where the burnt offering is slaughtered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where you kill the animal for the burnt offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 6 26 eaw2 figs-activepassive תֵּֽאָכֵ֔ל 1 It must be eaten If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He must eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 6 27 is2v כֹּ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־ יִגַּ֥ע בִּ⁠בְשָׂרָ֖⁠הּ יִקְדָּ֑שׁ 1 All that touches its meat will become holy See how you translated a similar sentence in [6-18](../06/18.md). +LEV 6 27 is2v כֹּ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־ יִגַּ֥ע בִּ⁠בְשָׂרָ֖⁠הּ יִקְדָּ֑שׁ 1 All that touches its meat will become holy See how you translated a similar sentence in [6:18](../06/18.md). LEV 6 27 vj7x figs-activepassive וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִזֶּ֤ה מִ⁠דָּמָ⁠הּ֙ 1 And if some of the blood is sprinkled If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And if the blood sprinkles” or “And if you sprinkle some of the blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 6 28 f316 figs-activepassive וּ⁠כְלִי־ חֶ֛רֶשׂ אֲשֶׁ֥ר תְּבֻשַּׁל־ בּ֖⁠וֹ יִשָּׁבֵ֑ר 1 And the pot of clay in which it is boiled must be broken If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And you must break the clay pot in which you boiled the meat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 6 28 e4tz figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִם־ בִּ⁠כְלִ֤י נְחֹ֨שֶׁת֙ בֻּשָּׁ֔לָה וּ⁠מֹרַ֥ק וְ⁠שֻׁטַּ֖ף בַּ⁠מָּֽיִם 1 And if it is boiled in a pot of bronze, then it must be scrubbed and rinsed in water If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And if you boiled the meat in a bronze pot, then you must scrub the pot and rinse it with clean water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ LEV 7 32 f116 שׁ֣וֹק הַ⁠יָּמִ֔ין 1 the right thigh The **thig LEV 7 34 sns3 לָקַ֨חְתִּי֙ 1 I have taken Here, **I** refers to Yahweh. LEV 7 36 mag4 בְּ⁠יוֹם֙ מָשְׁח֣⁠וֹ אֹתָ֔⁠ם 1 on the day of his anointing them Alternate translation: “on the day Moses anointed them as priests” LEV 7 36 sb6p לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 throughout their generations See how you translated these words in [Leviticus 3:17](../03/17.md). -LEV 7 37 duq2 1 Connecting Statement: Verses 37-38 are the end of a speech started in verse [Leviticus 7:29](../07/29.md). +LEV 7 37 duq2 0 Connecting Statement: Verses 37-38 are the end of a speech started in verse [Leviticus 7:29](../07/29.md). LEV 8 intro d9y6 0 # Leviticus 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Moses set apart, or consecrated, the sons of Aaron to be priests. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]]) LEV 8 1 n6q2 0 General Information: In chapter 8 Moses ordains Aaron and his sons as priests according to the commands of Yahweh that Moses recorded in the book of Exodus. LEV 8 2 i9xv הַ⁠בְּגָדִ֔ים 1 the garments Alternate translation: “the priestly garments” or “the clothes that the priests wore” @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ LEV 10 1 afy8 לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֵ֣שׁ זָרָ֔ה 1 befo LEV 10 2 et86 וַ⁠תֵּ֥צֵא אֵ֛שׁ מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 And fire went out from before the face of Yahweh Alternate translation: “So Yahweh sent out fire” LEV 10 2 f9fy figs-metaphor וַ⁠תֹּ֣אכַל אוֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 and it devoured them The fire completely burning the men up is spoken of as if the fire **devoured** or completely used them up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 10 2 c893 וַ⁠יָּמֻ֖תוּ לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 And they died before the face of Yahweh Alternate translation: “And they died in the presence of Yahweh” -LEV 10 3 pl7g figs-quotesinquotes הוּא֩ אֲשֶׁר־ דִּבֶּ֨ר יְהוָ֤ה׀ לֵ⁠אמֹר֙ בִּ⁠קְרֹבַ֣⁠י אֶקָּדֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠עַל־ פְּנֵ֥י כָל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם אֶכָּבֵ֑ד 1 This is what Yahweh spoke, saying,
‘Among those who come near me I will show myself as set apart. And on the faces of all the people I will be glorified This has a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “This is what Yahweh was talking about when he said that he would reveal his holiness to those who come near him, and that he will be glorified on the faces of the people.” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +LEV 10 3 pl7g figs-quotesinquotes הוּא֩ אֲשֶׁר־ דִּבֶּ֨ר יְהוָ֤ה׀ לֵ⁠אמֹר֙ בִּ⁠קְרֹבַ֣⁠י אֶקָּדֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠עַל־ פְּנֵ֥י כָל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם אֶכָּבֵ֑ד 1 This is what Yahweh spoke, saying,\n‘Among those who come near me I will show myself as set apart. And on the faces of all the people I will be glorified This has a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “This is what Yahweh was talking about when he said that he would reveal his holiness to those who come near him, and that he will be glorified on the faces of the people.” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LEV 10 3 c9g1 בִּ⁠קְרֹבַ֣⁠י אֶקָּדֵ֔שׁ 1 Among those who come near me I will show myself as set apart The phrase **those who come near me** refers to the priests that serve Yahweh. Alternate translation: “I will show those that come near to serve me that I am holy” or “Those who come near to serve me must treat me as holy” LEV 10 3 py8y figs-activepassive וְ⁠עַל־ פְּנֵ֥י כָל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם אֶכָּבֵ֑ד 1 I will be glorified before all the people This second part of Yahweh’s statement still concerns the priest, who are the ones who come near to Yahweh. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they must glorify me before all the people” or “And they must honor me in the presence of all the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 10 4 qzy6 translate-names מִֽישָׁאֵל֙…אֶלְצָפָ֔ן…בְּנֵ֥י עֻזִּיאֵ֖ל 1 Mishael … Elzaphan … Uzziel **Mishael**, **Elzaphan**, and **Uzziel** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ LEV 20 intro tvf2 0 # Leviticus 20 General Notes

## Structure and form LEV 20 2 b75v figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֨ר יִתֵּ֧ן מִ⁠זַּרְע֛⁠וֹ לַ⁠מֹּ֖לֶךְ 1 who gives any of his offspring to Molech Those who worshiped **Molech** sacrificed their children to him by means of fire. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “who kills any of his children as a sacrifice to Molech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LEV 20 2 wp2c figs-activepassive מ֣וֹת יוּמָ֑ת 1 must certainly be put to death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people in the land must certainly stone him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 20 3 h93p figs-idiom וַ⁠אֲנִ֞י אֶתֵּ֤ן אֶת־ פָּנַ⁠י֙ בָּ⁠אִ֣ישׁ הַ⁠ה֔וּא 1 I also will set my face against that man The idiom ***set me face** means he “firmly decided.” Alternate translation: “And I have made up my mind to oppose that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LEV 20 3 t5xb כִּ֤י מִ⁠זַּרְע⁠וֹ֙ נָתַ֣ן לַ⁠מֹּ֔לֶךְ 1 For he has given his offspring to Molech Se how you translated a similar phrase in [20:2](. /20/02.md). Alternate translation: “he has sacrificed his child” +LEV 20 3 t5xb כִּ֤י מִ⁠זַּרְע⁠וֹ֙ נָתַ֣ן לַ⁠מֹּ֔לֶךְ 1 For he has given his offspring to Molech Se how you translated a similar phrase in [20:2](../20/02.md). Alternate translation: “he has sacrificed his child” LEV 20 3 blk3 לְמַ֗עַן טַמֵּא֙ אֶת־ מִקְדָּשִׁ֔⁠י וּ⁠לְ⁠חַלֵּ֖ל אֶת־ שֵׁ֥ם קָדְשִֽׁ⁠י 1 so as to make my holy place unclean and to profane my holy name Alternate translation: “and by doing that, he has defiled my holy place and profaned my holy name” LEV 20 3 qcs4 figs-metonymy וּ⁠לְ⁠חַלֵּ֖ל אֶת־ שֵׁ֥ם קָדְשִֽׁ⁠י 1 profane my holy name Here God’s **name** represents God and his reputation. Alternate translation: “and to dishonor my reputation” or “and to dishonor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 20 4 u6g4 figs-metonymy הַעְלֵ֣ם יַעְלִימֽוּ֩ עַ֨ם הָ⁠אָ֜רֶץ אֶת־ עֵֽינֵי⁠הֶם֙ מִן־ הָ⁠אִ֣ישׁ הַ⁠ה֔וּא 1 the people of the land cause their eyes to be hidden at all from that man The phrase **to cause their eyes to be hidden** implies they do not see that thing. This speaks of ignoring something as closing the eyes. Alternate translation: “the people of the land disregard that man at all” or “the people of the land even partially ignore that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ LEV 22 7 w1dk figs-metaphor וְ⁠טָהֵ֑ר 1 then he will be clean A person LEV 22 8 tve2 figs-activepassive נְבֵלָ֧ה וּ⁠טְרֵפָ֛ה 1 an animal found dead or killed by wild animals If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “an animal that someone found dead or that a wild animal has killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 22 12 dg4g figs-abstractnouns בִּ⁠תְרוּמַ֥ת הַ⁠קֳּדָשִׁ֖ים 1 the holy contribution offerings If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **contributions**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “the holy offerings which people have contributed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LEV 22 14 rd8r וְ⁠יָסַ֤ף חֲמִֽשִׁית⁠וֹ֙ עָלָ֔י⁠ו וְ⁠נָתַ֥ן לַ⁠כֹּהֵ֖ן אֶת־ הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 then he must add its fifth on it and give the holy thing to the priest This could mean: (1) that the person had to replace the food that he had eaten with the same kind of food or (2) that the person had to pay money to the priest for the food that he had eaten. -LEV 22 14 kg3k translate-fraction 1 one-fifth The term **one-fifth** refers to one part out of five equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +LEV 22 14 kg3k translate-fraction חֲמִֽשִׁית⁠וֹ֙ 1 its fifth The term **its fifth** refers to one part out of five equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) LEV 22 15 qr33 translate-symaction אֵ֥ת אֲשֶׁר־ יָרִ֖ימוּ 1 that they lifted up Here the phrase **lifted up** refers to a symbolic gesture of respect that represents offering something to Yahweh. It means basically the same thing as “presented.” Alternate translation: “that they offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LEV 22 16 dbv5 figs-metaphor וְ⁠הִשִּׂ֤יאוּ אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ עֲוֺ֣ן אַשְׁמָ֔ה 1 and cause themselves to bear the guilt of the guilt offering Here, **guilt** is spoken of as if it were an object that people can carry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 22 16 t742 figs-metonymy וְ⁠הִשִּׂ֤יאוּ אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ עֲוֺ֣ן אַשְׁמָ֔ה 1 and cause themselves to bear the guilt of the guilt offering This could mean: (1) they would be responsible for their sin and so become guilty. Alternate translation: “they would be guilty for the sin that they committed” or (2) the word **guilt** is a metonym for punishment for the sin that they committed. Alternate translation: “they would receive the punishment because they are guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From d3c68c0578bd22d0bf9ab981665d469399a41f75 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 13 May 2022 10:07:16 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 166/166] Fix format of Leviticus --- en_tn_03-LEV.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv index 46b822d747..8f08745d1f 100644 --- a/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_03-LEV.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -LEV front intro nxz4 0 # Introduction to Leviticus\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of Leviticus\n\n1. Instructions to the Israelites about offerings (1:1–6:7)\n * Burnt offerings (1:1–17)\n * Grain offerings (2:1–16)\n * Fellowship offerings (3:1–17)\n * Offerings for unintentional sins (4:1-5:13)\n * Guilt offerings (5:14–6:7)\n2. Instructions to the priests about offerings (6:8–7:10)\n * Burnt offerings (6:8-13)\n * Grain offerings (6:14-23)\n * Sin offerings (6:24-30)\n * Guilt offerings (7:1-10)\n3. Further instructions to the Israelites (7:11–7:38)\n * Peace offerings (7:11–21)\n * Eating fat and blood forbidden (7:22-27)\n * The share for the priests (7:28–7:38)\n4. Setting apart the priests (8:1–10:20)\n * Aaron and his sons ordained (8:1–36)\n * Aaron as high priest (9:1–24)\n * Nadab and Abihu punished (10:1–20)\n5. Laws about clean and unclean things (11:1–15:33)\n * Clean and unclean food (11:1–47)\n * Women purified after giving birth to a child (12:1–8)\n * Skin, clothing, houses (13:1–14:47)\n * Bodily fluids (15:1–33)\n6. Day of Atonement; the place of the offering; the nature of blood (16:1–17:16)\n7. Setting apart for worship and service; being disqualified from service (18:1–24:23)\n8. The years of rest and release (25:1–55)\n9. Blessing for obeying and curses for not obeying (26:1–46)\n10. Gifts to God (27:1–34)\n\n### What is the book of Leviticus about?\n\nIn the Book of Leviticus, God continues to give laws through Moses to the people of Israel. The people were to obey all of these laws to honor their covenant with God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\n“Leviticus” means “about the Levites.” The Levites were the tribe of Israel that provided priests and other workers in the tabernacle. If the people in the project language do not understand the term “Levites,” you can call it “The Book about the Priests” or “The Book about the Tabernacle Workers.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Leviticus?\n\nThe writers of both the Old and New Testament present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Leviticus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.\n\n### What is the meaning of “holy” and “holiness” in the book of Leviticus?\n\nThese terms concern separating someone or something from the rest of the people, from the world, or from ordinary use. God separated these people or things so they would belong only to him. The people were to consider the places for worshiping God or for honoring him in any way as separate. The people could not use them for anything else. God required the Israelites to live in a certain way in order to live as a nation belonging to him alone.\n\nAnyone or anything that was acceptable to God or “holy” was spoken of as if they were physically clean.\n\nIn the same way, anyone or anything that was not acceptable to God or not holy was spoken of if they were physically unclean.\n\nSome people and some things could be made clean or “cleansed,” that is, acceptable to God. People or things were made clean if the people performed the right sacrifices and ceremonies. For example, some foreigners who wished to live among the Israelites and worship Yahweh could be made clean. However, other people and things could never be made acceptable to him.\n\nIt is important to know that not all unclean things or conditions were sinful. For example, after giving birth to a male child, a woman would be unclean for thirty-three days. Then the proper animal sacrifice would be offered for her. The flow of blood made the woman unclean ([Leviticus 12:7](../../lev/12/07.md)). But Leviticus never suggests that someone with a flow of blood was sinning. In the same way, God did not allow Israelites to eat many kinds of animals, as one way of setting his people apart.\n\nBecause God does not sin, the terms “holy” and “holiness” often suggest this same idea. Something belonging to God is holy. Because people must respect God, they must respect the things that belong to him.\n\n### What are the important narrative features of Leviticus?\n\nOn seventeen occasions, the phrase “The Lord said to Moses” (and sometimes Aaron) is often used to begin paragraphs. God and Moses frequently spoke to others. The verb “speak” is used thirty-eight times.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Why did the Israelites need so many rules about sacrificing animals?\n\nLeviticus shows that God is holy. That means God is very different from humanity and the rest of the created world. God does not sin. Because of this, it is impossible to be acceptable to him without being “cleansed.” The many kinds of sacrifices were meant to make people and things acceptable to God. However, the people had to continue making animal sacrifices so that they would continue to be acceptable to God. This was a sign that pointed to a need for a better sacrifice. They needed a sacrifice that would cause them to be acceptable to God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Why was the priesthood important in the book of Leviticus?\n\nPriests were individuals who went to God on behalf of the people. God authorized the priests to bring the Israelite’s sacrifices to himself.\n\n### How did the Israelite’s rules for worshiping God and sacrificing animals differ from the other nations at that time?\n\nIt was common for other nations to sacrifice animals to their idols. But, the other nations did other things to worship their false gods. For instance, people would sleep with prostitutes at the temple of their gods. They did this to try to persuade their gods to bless their land with the ability to grow crops. Also, people of other nations would sometimes offer human sacrifices to their gods. The God of Israel did not allow his people to do these kinds of things.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What important symbols are introduced in Leviticus?\n\nOil was poured on someone or something meant to be set apart for Yahweh. Water was used to symbolize the cleansing of someone or something so God could accept them. Blood was also used to cleanse and purify people and things. This is because blood represented life that needed to be shed in order for God to forgive people for sinning.\n\n### Why do many sections begin with the phrase “Yahweh said to Moses?”\n\nThis phrase shows the reader that these rules come from God and must be obeyed. You could also translate this as “God told Moses.” +LEV front intro nxz4 0 # Introduction to Leviticus

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Leviticus

1. Instructions to the Israelites about offerings (1:1–6:7)
* Burnt offerings (1:1–17)
* Grain offerings (2:1–16)
* Fellowship offerings (3:1–17)
* Offerings for unintentional sins (4:1-5:13)
* Guilt offerings (5:14–6:7)
2. Instructions to the priests about offerings (6:8–7:10)
* Burnt offerings (6:8-13)
* Grain offerings (6:14-23)
* Sin offerings (6:24-30)
* Guilt offerings (7:1-10)
3. Further instructions to the Israelites (7:11–7:38)
* Peace offerings (7:11–21)
* Eating fat and blood forbidden (7:22-27)
* The share for the priests (7:28–7:38)
4. Setting apart the priests (8:1–10:20)
* Aaron and his sons ordained (8:1–36)
* Aaron as high priest (9:1–24)
* Nadab and Abihu punished (10:1–20)
5. Laws about clean and unclean things (11:1–15:33)
* Clean and unclean food (11:1–47)
* Women purified after giving birth to a child (12:1–8)
* Skin, clothing, houses (13:1–14:47)
* Bodily fluids (15:1–33)
6. Day of Atonement; the place of the offering; the nature of blood (16:1–17:16)
7. Setting apart for worship and service; being disqualified from service (18:1–24:23)
8. The years of rest and release (25:1–55)
9. Blessing for obeying and curses for not obeying (26:1–46)
10. Gifts to God (27:1–34)

### What is the book of Leviticus about?

In the Book of Leviticus, God continues to give laws through Moses to the people of Israel. The people were to obey all of these laws to honor their covenant with God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

“Leviticus” means “about the Levites.” The Levites were the tribe of Israel that provided priests and other workers in the tabernacle. If the people in the project language do not understand the term “Levites,” you can call it “The Book about the Priests” or “The Book about the Tabernacle Workers.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Leviticus?

The writers of both the Old and New Testament present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Leviticus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.

### What is the meaning of “holy” and “holiness” in the book of Leviticus?

These terms concern separating someone or something from the rest of the people, from the world, or from ordinary use. God separated these people or things so they would belong only to him. The people were to consider the places for worshiping God or for honoring him in any way as separate. The people could not use them for anything else. God required the Israelites to live in a certain way in order to live as a nation belonging to him alone.

Anyone or anything that was acceptable to God or “holy” was spoken of as if they were physically clean.

In the same way, anyone or anything that was not acceptable to God or not holy was spoken of if they were physically unclean.

Some people and some things could be made clean or “cleansed,” that is, acceptable to God. People or things were made clean if the people performed the right sacrifices and ceremonies. For example, some foreigners who wished to live among the Israelites and worship Yahweh could be made clean. However, other people and things could never be made acceptable to him.

It is important to know that not all unclean things or conditions were sinful. For example, after giving birth to a male child, a woman would be unclean for thirty-three days. Then the proper animal sacrifice would be offered for her. The flow of blood made the woman unclean ([Leviticus 12:7](../../lev/12/07.md)). But Leviticus never suggests that someone with a flow of blood was sinning. In the same way, God did not allow Israelites to eat many kinds of animals, as one way of setting his people apart.

Because God does not sin, the terms “holy” and “holiness” often suggest this same idea. Something belonging to God is holy. Because people must respect God, they must respect the things that belong to him.

### What are the important narrative features of Leviticus?

On seventeen occasions, the phrase “The Lord said to Moses” (and sometimes Aaron) is often used to begin paragraphs. God and Moses frequently spoke to others. The verb “speak” is used thirty-eight times.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Why did the Israelites need so many rules about sacrificing animals?

Leviticus shows that God is holy. That means God is very different from humanity and the rest of the created world. God does not sin. Because of this, it is impossible to be acceptable to him without being “cleansed.” The many kinds of sacrifices were meant to make people and things acceptable to God. However, the people had to continue making animal sacrifices so that they would continue to be acceptable to God. This was a sign that pointed to a need for a better sacrifice. They needed a sacrifice that would cause them to be acceptable to God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Why was the priesthood important in the book of Leviticus?

Priests were individuals who went to God on behalf of the people. God authorized the priests to bring the Israelite’s sacrifices to himself.

### How did the Israelite’s rules for worshiping God and sacrificing animals differ from the other nations at that time?

It was common for other nations to sacrifice animals to their idols. But, the other nations did other things to worship their false gods. For instance, people would sleep with prostitutes at the temple of their gods. They did this to try to persuade their gods to bless their land with the ability to grow crops. Also, people of other nations would sometimes offer human sacrifices to their gods. The God of Israel did not allow his people to do these kinds of things.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What important symbols are introduced in Leviticus?

Oil was poured on someone or something meant to be set apart for Yahweh. Water was used to symbolize the cleansing of someone or something so God could accept them. Blood was also used to cleanse and purify people and things. This is because blood represented life that needed to be shed in order for God to forgive people for sinning.

### Why do many sections begin with the phrase “Yahweh said to Moses?”

This phrase shows the reader that these rules come from God and must be obeyed. You could also translate this as “God told Moses.” LEV 1 intro ecv8 0 # Leviticus 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In Hebrew, this chapter begins with the word “and” indicating a connection with the previous book (Exodus). The first five books of the Bible should be seen as a single unit.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Atonement

In order to offer a sacrifice for the people, the priest first had to make an atonement for himself, in order to make himself clean. Only then would he be clean and be allowed to perform a sacrifice. These sacrificed animals had to be perfect, the best of all of the animals. A person was not allowed to bring an inferior animal to be sacrificed to Yahweh. These sacrifices also had to be offered in a very specific way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]]) LEV 1 1 j8us יְהוָה֙ 1 Yahweh **Yahweh** is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this. LEV 1 2 yiq7 אָדָ֗ם כִּֽי־ יַקְרִ֥יב מִ⁠כֶּ֛ם 1 When any man from among you Alternate translation: “When any one of you offers” or “When any of you offers” @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ LEV 10 1 afy8 לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֵ֣שׁ זָרָ֔ה 1 befo LEV 10 2 et86 וַ⁠תֵּ֥צֵא אֵ֛שׁ מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 And fire went out from before the face of Yahweh Alternate translation: “So Yahweh sent out fire” LEV 10 2 f9fy figs-metaphor וַ⁠תֹּ֣אכַל אוֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 and it devoured them The fire completely burning the men up is spoken of as if the fire **devoured** or completely used them up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 10 2 c893 וַ⁠יָּמֻ֖תוּ לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 And they died before the face of Yahweh Alternate translation: “And they died in the presence of Yahweh” -LEV 10 3 pl7g figs-quotesinquotes הוּא֩ אֲשֶׁר־ דִּבֶּ֨ר יְהוָ֤ה׀ לֵ⁠אמֹר֙ בִּ⁠קְרֹבַ֣⁠י אֶקָּדֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠עַל־ פְּנֵ֥י כָל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם אֶכָּבֵ֑ד 1 This is what Yahweh spoke, saying,\n‘Among those who come near me I will show myself as set apart. And on the faces of all the people I will be glorified This has a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “This is what Yahweh was talking about when he said that he would reveal his holiness to those who come near him, and that he will be glorified on the faces of the people.” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +LEV 10 3 pl7g figs-quotesinquotes הוּא֩ אֲשֶׁר־ דִּבֶּ֨ר יְהוָ֤ה׀ לֵ⁠אמֹר֙ בִּ⁠קְרֹבַ֣⁠י אֶקָּדֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠עַל־ פְּנֵ֥י כָל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם אֶכָּבֵ֑ד 1 This is what Yahweh spoke, saying, ‘Among those who come near me I will show myself as set apart. And on the faces of all the people I will be glorified This has a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “This is what Yahweh was talking about when he said that he would reveal his holiness to those who come near him, and that he will be glorified on the faces of the people.” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LEV 10 3 c9g1 בִּ⁠קְרֹבַ֣⁠י אֶקָּדֵ֔שׁ 1 Among those who come near me I will show myself as set apart The phrase **those who come near me** refers to the priests that serve Yahweh. Alternate translation: “I will show those that come near to serve me that I am holy” or “Those who come near to serve me must treat me as holy” LEV 10 3 py8y figs-activepassive וְ⁠עַל־ פְּנֵ֥י כָל־ הָ⁠עָ֖ם אֶכָּבֵ֑ד 1 I will be glorified before all the people This second part of Yahweh’s statement still concerns the priest, who are the ones who come near to Yahweh. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they must glorify me before all the people” or “And they must honor me in the presence of all the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 10 4 qzy6 translate-names מִֽישָׁאֵל֙…אֶלְצָפָ֔ן…בְּנֵ֥י עֻזִּיאֵ֖ל 1 Mishael … Elzaphan … Uzziel **Mishael**, **Elzaphan**, and **Uzziel** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ LEV 11 43 fzj2 figs-parallelism אַל־ תְּשַׁקְּצוּ֙ אֶת־ נ LEV 11 43 hj9h figs-metaphor וְ⁠לֹ֤א תִֽטַּמְּאוּ֙ 1 And you must not make yourselves unclean A person who is unacceptable for God’s purposes is spoken of as if he were physically **unclean**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 11 47 x81a figs-metaphor בֵּ֥ין הַ⁠טָּמֵ֖א וּ⁠בֵ֣ין הַ⁠טָּהֹ֑ר 1 between the unclean and the clean Animals that God declared to be unfit for the people to touch or eat are spoken of as if they were physically **unclean**, and those which he declared to be acceptable for the people to touch and eat are spoken of as if they were physically **clean**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 11 47 e7h6 figs-activepassive הַֽ⁠נֶּאֱכֶ֔לֶת…אֲשֶׁ֖ר לֹ֥א תֵאָכֵֽל 1 that may be eaten … that may not be eaten If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you may eat … that you may not eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 12 intro p2iu 0 # Leviticus 12 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Menstruation\n\nA woman was considered to be unclean after she began to bleed from her womb every month and after having a baby. This was because all blood was considered to be unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]]) +LEV 12 intro p2iu 0 # Leviticus 12 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Menstruation

A woman was considered to be unclean after she began to bleed from her womb every month and after having a baby. This was because all blood was considered to be unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]]) LEV 12 2 wr5g figs-metaphor אִשָּׁה֙ כִּ֣י תַזְרִ֔יעַ וְ⁠יָלְדָ֖ה זָכָ֑ר וְ⁠טָֽמְאָה֙ 1 If a woman bears seed and gives birth to a male child, then she will be unclean A woman whom other people must not touch because she is bleeding from her womb is spoken of as if she were physically **unclean**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 12 2 tuc3 figs-euphemism כִּ⁠ימֵ֛י נִדַּ֥ת דְּוֺתָ֖⁠הּ 1 as at the time of the bleeding of her menstruation This refers to the time of the month when a woman bleeds from her womb. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LEV 12 3 rcr8 figs-activepassive יִמּ֖וֹל בְּשַׂ֥ר עָרְלָתֽ⁠וֹ 1 the flesh of his foreskin must be circumcised Only the priest could perform this action. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a priest must circumcise the baby boy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ LEV 13 2 ukq4 אַחַ֥ד מִ⁠בָּנָ֖י⁠ו 1 one of his sons Alterna LEV 13 3 xqd3 מֵ⁠ע֣וֹר בְּשָׂר֔⁠וֹ 1 on the skin of his body Here, **his** refers to the person with the skin disease. LEV 13 3 k3cb figs-metaphor וְ⁠טִמֵּ֥א אֹתֽ⁠וֹ 1 and will pronounce him unclean The man whom other people must not touch is spoken of as if he were physically **unclean**. Alternate translation: “must pronounce the man unclean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 13 5 g2eb וְ⁠רָאָ֣⁠הוּ הַ⁠כֹּהֵן֮ 1 And the priest must look at him Here, **him** refers to the person with the skin disease. -LEV 13 5 a6bj translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִי֒ 1 on the seventh day The word **seventh** is the ordinal form of "seven." Alternate translation: “on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +LEV 13 5 a6bj translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִי֒ 1 on the seventh day The word **seventh** is the ordinal form of “seven.” Alternate translation: “on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LEV 13 5 z468 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֤ה הַ⁠נֶּ֨גַע֙ עָמַ֣ד בְּ⁠עֵינָ֔י⁠ו לֹֽא־ פָשָׂ֥ה הַ⁠נֶּ֖גַע בָּ⁠ע֑וֹר 1 and if the skin disease has stayed unchanged in his eyes and the skin disease has not spread on the skin This means if the skin disease has not increased in size or moved to other parts of the body. LEV 13 6 cx9z figs-metaphor וְ⁠טִהֲר֤⁠וֹ הַ⁠כֹּהֵן֙…וְ⁠טָהֵֽר 1 then the priest will pronounce him clean … and then he will be clean The man whom other people may touch is spoken of as if he were physically **clean**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 13 6 wn1f מִסְפַּ֣חַת 1 a rash A **rash** is an area of the skin that is irritated. @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ LEV 13 47 yjv7 וְ⁠הַ⁠בֶּ֕גֶד כִּֽי־ יִהְיֶ֥ה ב֖ LEV 13 48 ww38 figs-activepassive בְּ⁠כָל־ מְלֶ֥אכֶת עֽוֹר 1 in anything made with leather If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in anything that someone has made from leather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 13 49 bk97 וְ⁠הָיָ֨ה הַ⁠נֶּ֜גַע יְרַקְרַ֣ק׀ א֣וֹ אֲדַמְדָּ֗ם בַּ⁠בֶּגֶד֩ 1 if the infection is greenish or reddish in the garment Alternate translation: “if there is greenish or reddish infection in the garment” LEV 13 49 xcr7 figs-activepassive וְ⁠הָרְאָ֖ה אֶת־ הַ⁠כֹּהֵֽן 1 And it must be shown to the priest If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And he owner must show it to a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LEV 13 51 b5hr translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 on the seventh day The word **seventh” is the ordinal number for "seven." Alternate translation: “on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +LEV 13 51 b5hr translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 on the seventh day The word **seventh” is the ordinal number for “seven.” Alternate translation: “on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LEV 13 51 n4xg figs-activepassive לְ⁠כֹ֛ל אֲשֶׁר־ יֵעָשֶׂ֥ה הָ⁠ע֖וֹר לִ⁠מְלָאכָ֑ה 1 whatever the work for which the leather is used If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “anything in which a person uses leather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LEV 13 51 b3jb figs-metaphor טָמֵ֥א הֽוּא 1 it is unclean Something that God has declared to be unfit for people to touch is spoken of as if it were physically **unclean**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LEV 13 52 r25j figs-activepassive בָּ⁠אֵ֖שׁ תִּשָּׂרֵֽף 1 In the fire it must be burned up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He must burn the item in the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -746,7 +746,7 @@ LEV 18 9 u8th figs-euphemism עֶרְוַ֨ת אֲחֽוֹתְ⁠ךָ֤ בַת־ LEV 18 9 i3mf בַת־ אָבִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ א֣וֹ בַת־ אִמֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 the daughter of your father or the daughter of your mother This means a man cannot have sexual intercourse with his sister even if she has a different mother or father. LEV 18 10 hn2p כִּ֥י עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ הֵֽנָּה 1 for they are your nakedness Alternate translation: “for you will dishonor yourself as well as them” LEV 18 11 g9ak בַּת־ אֵ֤שֶׁת אָבִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 your father’s wife’s daughter This could mean: (1) “your half-sister” or (2) “your stepsister.” Here the man does not have the same father or mother as the woman. They became brother and sister when their parents married. -LEV 18 12 pz5f figs-euphemism עֶרְוַ֥ת אֲחוֹת־ אָבִ֖י⁠ךָ לֹ֣א תְגַלֵּ֑ה 1 The nakedness of your father’s sister you must not uncover This is a euphemism for sexual activity. See how this is translated in [Leviticus 18:7](../18/07.md). Alternate translation: “Do not have sexual relations with your father's sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +LEV 18 12 pz5f figs-euphemism עֶרְוַ֥ת אֲחוֹת־ אָבִ֖י⁠ךָ לֹ֣א תְגַלֵּ֑ה 1 The nakedness of your father’s sister you must not uncover This is a euphemism for sexual activity. See how this is translated in [Leviticus 18:7](../18/07.md). Alternate translation: “Do not have sexual relations with your father’s sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LEV 18 14 pwu9 figs-explicit אֶל־ אִשְׁתּ⁠וֹ֙ לֹ֣א תִקְרָ֔ב 1 to his wife you must not come near You may have to make explicit the purpose of the approach. Alternate translation: “do not go to his wife in order to have sexual intercourse with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LEV 18 15 dj86 figs-euphemism עֶרְוַ֥ת כַּלָּֽתְ⁠ךָ֖ לֹ֣א תְגַלֵּ֑ה 1 The nakedness of your daughter-in-law you must not uncover This is a euphemism for sexual activity. See how this is translated in [Leviticus 18:7](../18/07.md). Alternate translation: “Do not have sexual relations with your daughter-in-law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LEV 18 15 c463 figs-euphemism לֹ֥א תְגַלֶּ֖ה עֶרְוָתָֽ⁠הּ 1 You must not uncover her nakedness This is a euphemism for sexual activity. Alternate translation: “you must not have sexual relations with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) @@ -986,7 +986,7 @@ LEV 24 7 ixi1 figs-explicit וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֥ עַל־ הַֽ⁠מַּעֲ LEV 24 7 v5k2 figs-explicit וְ⁠הָיְתָ֤ה לַ⁠לֶּ֨חֶם֙ לְ⁠אַזְכָּרָ֔ה 1 and it will be a memorial portion for the bread What the incense would represent can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “and it will represent the loaves as an offering” or “and it will be an offering that represents the loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LEV 24 9 x294 וְ⁠הָֽיְתָה֙ 1 And it will be Alternate translation: “And this bread that is offered will be” LEV 24 9 c8b1 מֵ⁠אִשֵּׁ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 from Yahweh’s offerings made by fire Alternate translation: “fro the burnt offerings to Yahweh” or “from the offerings that you burn to Yahweh” -LEV 24 10 v13h וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ 1 Now … went out This phrase marks a new section of the book. +LEV 24 10 v13h וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ 1 Now … went out This phrase marks a new section of the book. LEV 24 11 uzp5 figs-parallelism וַ֠⁠יִּקֹּב בֶּן־ הָֽ⁠אִשָּׁ֨ה הַ⁠יִּשְׂרְאֵלִ֤ית אֶת־ הַ⁠שֵּׁם֙ וַ⁠יְקַלֵּ֔ל 1 And the son of the Israelite woman blasphemed the Name and cursed The words **blasphemed** and **cursed** mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “And the son of the Israelite woman blasphemed Yahweh by cursing him” or “And the son of the Israelite woman said terrible things about Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LEV 24 11 x1rf translate-names שְׁלֹמִ֥ית 1 Shelomith **Shelomith** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LEV 24 11 y53u translate-names בַּת־ דִּבְרִ֖י 1 the daughter of Dibri ** Dibri** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ LEV 26 5 unad figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם לַחְמְ⁠כ LEV 26 6 m5jk וְ⁠נָתַתִּ֤י שָׁלוֹם֙ בָּ⁠אָ֔רֶץ 1 And I will give peace in the land Alternate translation: “And I will cause there to be peace in the land” LEV 26 6 s3gb figs-metonymy וְ⁠חֶ֖רֶב לֹא־ תַעֲבֹ֥ר בְּ⁠אַרְצְ⁠כֶֽם 1 and the sword will not pass through your land Here the word **sword** represents enemy armies or enemy attacks. Alternate translation: “and no armies will attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LEV 26 7 xxd1 figs-metonymy וְ⁠נָפְל֥וּ לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם לֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 and they will fall before your face by the sword Here, **fall** represents dying, and **the sword** represents either attacking people with a sword or battle in general. Alternate translation: “and they will die when you attack them with the sword” or “and you will kill them in battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 26 8 nd6t וְ⁠רָדְפ֨וּ מִ⁠כֶּ֤ם חֲמִשָּׁה֙ מֵאָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵאָ֥ה מִ⁠כֶּ֖ם רְבָבָ֣ה יִרְדֹּ֑פוּ 1 And five from you will pursue a hundred, and a hundred from you will pursue ten thousand This means the Israelites will have victory against larger armies. +LEV 26 8 nd6t וְ⁠רָדְפ֨וּ מִ⁠כֶּ֤ם חֲמִשָּׁה֙ מֵאָ֔ה וּ⁠מֵאָ֥ה מִ⁠כֶּ֖ם רְבָבָ֣ה יִרְדֹּ֑פוּ 1 And five from you will pursue a hundred, and a hundred from you will pursue ten thousand This means the Israelites will have victory against larger armies. LEV 26 9 p7zz וּ⁠פָנִ֣יתִי אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 And I will turn to you Alternate translation: “And I will show you favor” or “And I will bless you” LEV 26 9 fq7x figs-doublet וְ⁠הִפְרֵיתִ֣י אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠הִרְבֵּיתִ֖י אֶתְ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 and make you fruitful and multiply you These two phrases refer to God causing them to have many descendants so they become a large group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LEV 26 9 l7q1 figs-metaphor וְ⁠הִפְרֵיתִ֣י אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 and make you fruitful God speaks of them having many children as if they were trees that bear a lot of fruit. Alternate translation: “and cause you to have many children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1151,7 +1151,7 @@ LEV 27 12 yzw5 כְּ⁠עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֥ 1 According to the valuation of LEV 27 13 f9my גָּאֹ֖ל יִגְאָלֶ֑⁠נָּה 1 he ever redeems it Alternate translation: “he every buys it back” LEV 27 15 ugc7 translate-fraction וְ֠⁠יָסַף חֲמִישִׁ֧ית כֶּֽסֶף־ עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֛ עָלָ֖י⁠ו 1 then he must add a fifth of the silver of your valuation to it A **fifth** is a part of something that is divided into five equal parts. Alternate translation: “then he must divide the value of the house into five equal parts, add the amount equal to one of those parts, and pay all of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) LEV 27 16 l7we figs-metonymy וְ⁠הָיָ֥ה עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠פִ֣י זַרְע֑⁠וֹ זֶ֚רַע חֹ֣מֶר שְׂעֹרִ֔ים בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים שֶׁ֥קֶל כָּֽסֶף 1 then your valuation will be in proportion to its seed—a homer of barley seed for 50 shekels of silver Here, **a homer of barley seed** represents a piece of land that would need one homer of barley in order to plant on all of it. Alternate translation: “then you will value a piece of land that requires one homer of barley in order to plant all of it at 50 shekels of silver” or ‘then the value of land that requires one homer of barley will be 50 shekels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LEV 27 16 ub6b translate-bvolume חֹ֣מֶר 1 a homer of A **homer** is 220 liters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) +LEV 27 16 ub6b translate-bvolume חֹ֣מֶר 1 a homer of A **homer** is 220 liters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) LEV 27 16 pve5 translate-bweight בַּ⁠חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים שֶׁ֥קֶל כָּֽסֶף 1 for fifty shekels of silver If it is necessary to use modern weight units, here are two way of doing it. Alternate translation: “50 pieces of silver, each of which weighs ten grams” or “500 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) LEV 27 17 b2qb מִ⁠שְּׁנַ֥ת הַ⁠יֹּבֵ֖ל 1 during the year of Jubilee The **Jubilee** occurs every 50 years. See how you translated **Jubilee** in [Leviticus 25:10](../25/10.md). LEV 27 17 wa1x figs-metaphor כְּ⁠עֶרְכְּ⁠ךָ֖ יָקֽוּם 1 according to your valuation it will stand Here, **stand** represents “remain” or “remain the same.” Alternate translation: “its value will remain the same” or “its value will be the full amount” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])